elf64-s390.c revision 1.1.1.11 1 1.1 skrll /* IBM S/390-specific support for 64-bit ELF
2 1.1.1.11 christos Copyright (C) 2000-2025 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 1.1 skrll Contributed Martin Schwidefsky (schwidefsky (at) de.ibm.com).
4 1.1 skrll
5 1.1 skrll This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
6 1.1 skrll
7 1.1 skrll This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
8 1.1 skrll it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
9 1.1 skrll the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
10 1.1 skrll (at your option) any later version.
11 1.1 skrll
12 1.1 skrll This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
13 1.1 skrll but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
14 1.1 skrll MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
15 1.1 skrll GNU General Public License for more details.
16 1.1 skrll
17 1.1 skrll You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18 1.1 skrll along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
19 1.1 skrll Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
20 1.1 skrll 02110-1301, USA. */
21 1.1 skrll
22 1.1 skrll #include "sysdep.h"
23 1.1 skrll #include "bfd.h"
24 1.1 skrll #include "bfdlink.h"
25 1.1 skrll #include "libbfd.h"
26 1.1 skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
27 1.1 skrll #include "elf/s390.h"
28 1.1.1.6 christos #include "elf-s390.h"
29 1.1.1.11 christos #include "dwarf2.h"
30 1.1.1.11 christos #include "sframe.h"
31 1.1.1.11 christos #include "sframe-api.h"
32 1.1.1.6 christos #include <stdarg.h>
33 1.1 skrll
34 1.1 skrll /* In case we're on a 32-bit machine, construct a 64-bit "-1" value
35 1.1 skrll from smaller values. Start with zero, widen, *then* decrement. */
36 1.1 skrll #define MINUS_ONE (((bfd_vma)0) - 1)
37 1.1 skrll
38 1.1.1.3 christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
39 1.1.1.3 christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
40 1.1.1.3 christos asection *, bfd *, char **);
41 1.1.1.3 christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
42 1.1.1.3 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
43 1.1.1.3 christos asection *, bfd *, char **);
44 1.1.1.3 christos
45 1.1 skrll /* The relocation "howto" table. */
46 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf_howto_table[] =
47 1.1 skrll {
48 1.1 skrll HOWTO (R_390_NONE, /* type */
49 1.1 skrll 0, /* rightshift */
50 1.1.1.9 christos 0, /* size */
51 1.1 skrll 0, /* bitsize */
52 1.1.1.9 christos false, /* pc_relative */
53 1.1 skrll 0, /* bitpos */
54 1.1 skrll complain_overflow_dont, /* complain_on_overflow */
55 1.1 skrll bfd_elf_generic_reloc, /* special_function */
56 1.1 skrll "R_390_NONE", /* name */
57 1.1.1.9 christos false, /* partial_inplace */
58 1.1 skrll 0, /* src_mask */
59 1.1 skrll 0, /* dst_mask */
60 1.1.1.9 christos false), /* pcrel_offset */
61 1.1 skrll
62 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_8, 0, 1, 8, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
63 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_8", false, 0,0x000000ff, false),
64 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
65 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
66 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
67 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
68 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
69 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
70 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC32, 0, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
71 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32", false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
72 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
73 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
74 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
75 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
76 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT32, 0, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
77 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
78 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_COPY, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
79 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_COPY", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
80 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GLOB_DAT, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
81 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GLOB_DAT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
82 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_JMP_SLOT, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
83 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_JMP_SLOT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
84 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_RELATIVE, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
85 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_RELATIVE", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
86 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
87 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF32", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
88 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPC, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
89 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPC", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
90 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
91 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
92 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC16, 0, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
93 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
94 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC16DBL, 1, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
95 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16DBL", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
96 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT16DBL, 1, 2, 16, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
97 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT16DBL", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
98 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC32DBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
99 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32DBL", false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
100 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT32DBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
101 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32DBL", false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
102 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPCDBL, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
103 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPCDBL", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
104 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
105 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
106 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC64, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
107 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
108 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
109 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
110 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT64, 0, 8, 64, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
111 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
112 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
113 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTENT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
114 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
115 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
116 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
117 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
118 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
119 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
120 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
121 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
122 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
123 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
124 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
125 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
126 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLTENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
127 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLTENT",false, 0,MINUS_ONE, true),
128 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF16, 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
129 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
130 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF32, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
131 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
132 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
133 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE, false),
134 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LOAD, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
135 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LOAD", false, 0, 0, false),
136 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
137 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GDCALL", false, 0, 0, false),
138 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
139 1.1.1.9 christos s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDCALL", false, 0, 0, false),
140 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GD32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GD32. */
141 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GD64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
142 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GD64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
143 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
144 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE12", false, 0, 0x00000fff, false),
145 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GOTIE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GOTIE32. */
146 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
147 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
148 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDM32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDM32. */
149 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDM64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
150 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDM64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
151 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_IE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_IE32. */
152 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
153 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
154 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IEENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
155 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IEENT", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, true),
156 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LE32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LE32. */
157 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LE64, 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
158 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
159 1.1 skrll EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDO32), /* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDO32. */
160 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDO64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
161 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDO64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
162 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPMOD, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
163 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPMOD", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
164 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
165 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
166 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_TPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
167 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_TPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
168 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
169 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
170 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOT20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
171 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOT20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
172 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
173 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
174 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
175 1.1.1.9 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
176 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_IRELATIVE, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
177 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_IRELATIVE", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
178 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC12DBL, 1, 2, 12, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
179 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC12DBL", false, 0,0x00000fff, true),
180 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT12DBL, 1, 2, 12, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
181 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT12DBL", false, 0,0x00000fff, true),
182 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PC24DBL, 1, 4, 24, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
183 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC24DBL", false, 0,0x00ffffff, true),
184 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO(R_390_PLT24DBL, 1, 4, 24, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
185 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT24DBL", false, 0,0x00ffffff, true),
186 1.1 skrll };
187 1.1 skrll
188 1.1 skrll /* GNU extension to record C++ vtable hierarchy. */
189 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto =
190 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, NULL, "R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT", false,0, 0, false);
191 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtentry_howto =
192 1.1.1.9 christos HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTENTRY, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, _bfd_elf_rel_vtable_reloc_fn,"R_390_GNU_VTENTRY", false,0,0, false);
193 1.1 skrll
194 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type *
195 1.1.1.7 christos elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup (bfd *abfd,
196 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_reloc_code_real_type code)
197 1.1 skrll {
198 1.1 skrll switch (code)
199 1.1 skrll {
200 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_NONE:
201 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_NONE];
202 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_8:
203 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_8];
204 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_12:
205 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_12];
206 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16:
207 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_16];
208 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32:
209 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
210 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_CTOR:
211 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
212 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_PCREL:
213 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32];
214 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT12:
215 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT12];
216 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_GOT_PCREL:
217 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT32];
218 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32:
219 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32];
220 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_COPY:
221 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_COPY];
222 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GLOB_DAT:
223 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GLOB_DAT];
224 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_JMP_SLOT:
225 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_JMP_SLOT];
226 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_RELATIVE:
227 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_RELATIVE];
228 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_32_GOTOFF:
229 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF32];
230 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPC:
231 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPC];
232 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT16:
233 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT16];
234 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16_PCREL:
235 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16];
236 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PC12DBL:
237 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC12DBL];
238 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT12DBL:
239 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT12DBL];
240 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PC16DBL:
241 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16DBL];
242 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT16DBL:
243 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT16DBL];
244 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PC24DBL:
245 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC24DBL];
246 1.1.1.4 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT24DBL:
247 1.1.1.4 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT24DBL];
248 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PC32DBL:
249 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32DBL];
250 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32DBL:
251 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32DBL];
252 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPCDBL:
253 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPCDBL];
254 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_64:
255 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_64];
256 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_64_PCREL:
257 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC64];
258 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT64:
259 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT64];
260 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT64:
261 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT64];
262 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTENT:
263 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTENT];
264 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_16_GOTOFF:
265 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF16];
266 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTOFF64:
267 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF64];
268 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT12:
269 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT12];
270 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT16:
271 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT16];
272 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT32:
273 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT32];
274 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT64:
275 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT64];
276 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLTENT:
277 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLTENT];
278 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF16:
279 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF16];
280 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF32:
281 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF32];
282 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF64:
283 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF64];
284 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LOAD:
285 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LOAD];
286 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GDCALL:
287 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GDCALL];
288 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDCALL:
289 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDCALL];
290 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GD64:
291 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GD64];
292 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
293 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE12];
294 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
295 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE64];
296 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDM64:
297 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDM64];
298 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IE64:
299 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IE64];
300 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IEENT:
301 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IEENT];
302 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LE64:
303 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LE64];
304 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDO64:
305 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDO64];
306 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPMOD:
307 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPMOD];
308 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPOFF:
309 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPOFF];
310 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_TPOFF:
311 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_TPOFF];
312 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_20:
313 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_20];
314 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT20:
315 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT20];
316 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT20:
317 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT20];
318 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
319 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE20];
320 1.1.1.3 christos case BFD_RELOC_390_IRELATIVE:
321 1.1.1.3 christos return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_IRELATIVE];
322 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_INHERIT:
323 1.1 skrll return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
324 1.1 skrll case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_ENTRY:
325 1.1 skrll return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
326 1.1 skrll default:
327 1.1 skrll break;
328 1.1 skrll }
329 1.1.1.7 christos
330 1.1.1.7 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
331 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"), abfd, (int) code);
332 1.1.1.7 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
333 1.1.1.7 christos return NULL;
334 1.1 skrll }
335 1.1 skrll
336 1.1 skrll static reloc_howto_type *
337 1.1 skrll elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
338 1.1 skrll const char *r_name)
339 1.1 skrll {
340 1.1 skrll unsigned int i;
341 1.1 skrll
342 1.1 skrll for (i = 0;
343 1.1 skrll i < sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]);
344 1.1 skrll i++)
345 1.1 skrll if (elf_howto_table[i].name != NULL
346 1.1 skrll && strcasecmp (elf_howto_table[i].name, r_name) == 0)
347 1.1 skrll return &elf_howto_table[i];
348 1.1 skrll
349 1.1.1.5 christos if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
350 1.1.1.5 christos return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
351 1.1.1.5 christos if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtentry_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
352 1.1.1.5 christos return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
353 1.1 skrll
354 1.1 skrll return NULL;
355 1.1 skrll }
356 1.1 skrll
357 1.1 skrll /* We need to use ELF64_R_TYPE so we have our own copy of this function,
358 1.1 skrll and elf64-s390.c has its own copy. */
359 1.1 skrll
360 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
361 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_info_to_howto (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
362 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *cache_ptr,
363 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *dst)
364 1.1 skrll {
365 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE(dst->r_info);
366 1.1.1.7 christos
367 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
368 1.1 skrll {
369 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
370 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
371 1.1 skrll break;
372 1.1 skrll
373 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
374 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
375 1.1 skrll break;
376 1.1 skrll
377 1.1 skrll default:
378 1.1 skrll if (r_type >= sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]))
379 1.1 skrll {
380 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
381 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"),
382 1.1.1.7 christos abfd, r_type);
383 1.1.1.7 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
384 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
385 1.1 skrll }
386 1.1 skrll cache_ptr->howto = &elf_howto_table[r_type];
387 1.1 skrll }
388 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
389 1.1 skrll }
390 1.1 skrll
391 1.1 skrll /* A relocation function which doesn't do anything. */
392 1.1 skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
393 1.1.1.3 christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
394 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *reloc_entry,
395 1.1.1.3 christos asymbol *symbol ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
396 1.1.1.3 christos void * data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
397 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section,
398 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *output_bfd,
399 1.1.1.3 christos char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
400 1.1 skrll {
401 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd)
402 1.1 skrll reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
403 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok;
404 1.1 skrll }
405 1.1 skrll
406 1.1 skrll /* Handle the large displacement relocs. */
407 1.1 skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
408 1.1.1.3 christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *abfd,
409 1.1.1.3 christos arelent *reloc_entry,
410 1.1.1.3 christos asymbol *symbol,
411 1.1.1.3 christos void * data,
412 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section,
413 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *output_bfd,
414 1.1.1.3 christos char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
415 1.1 skrll {
416 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto = reloc_entry->howto;
417 1.1 skrll bfd_vma relocation;
418 1.1 skrll bfd_vma insn;
419 1.1 skrll
420 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd != (bfd *) NULL
421 1.1 skrll && (symbol->flags & BSF_SECTION_SYM) == 0
422 1.1 skrll && (! howto->partial_inplace
423 1.1 skrll || reloc_entry->addend == 0))
424 1.1 skrll {
425 1.1 skrll reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
426 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok;
427 1.1 skrll }
428 1.1 skrll if (output_bfd != NULL)
429 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_continue;
430 1.1 skrll
431 1.1 skrll if (reloc_entry->address > bfd_get_section_limit (abfd, input_section))
432 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_outofrange;
433 1.1 skrll
434 1.1 skrll relocation = (symbol->value
435 1.1 skrll + symbol->section->output_section->vma
436 1.1 skrll + symbol->section->output_offset);
437 1.1 skrll relocation += reloc_entry->addend;
438 1.1 skrll if (howto->pc_relative)
439 1.1 skrll {
440 1.1 skrll relocation -= (input_section->output_section->vma
441 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset);
442 1.1 skrll relocation -= reloc_entry->address;
443 1.1 skrll }
444 1.1 skrll
445 1.1.1.4 christos insn = bfd_get_32 (abfd, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
446 1.1 skrll insn |= (relocation & 0xfff) << 16 | (relocation & 0xff000) >> 4;
447 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (abfd, insn, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
448 1.1 skrll
449 1.1 skrll if ((bfd_signed_vma) relocation < - 0x80000
450 1.1 skrll || (bfd_signed_vma) relocation > 0x7ffff)
451 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_overflow;
452 1.1 skrll else
453 1.1 skrll return bfd_reloc_ok;
454 1.1 skrll }
455 1.1 skrll
456 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
457 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_is_local_label_name (bfd *abfd, const char *name)
458 1.1 skrll {
459 1.1 skrll if (name[0] == '.' && (name[1] == 'X' || name[1] == 'L'))
460 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
461 1.1 skrll
462 1.1 skrll return _bfd_elf_is_local_label_name (abfd, name);
463 1.1 skrll }
464 1.1 skrll
465 1.1 skrll /* Functions for the 390 ELF linker. */
466 1.1 skrll
467 1.1 skrll /* The name of the dynamic interpreter. This is put in the .interp
468 1.1 skrll section. */
469 1.1 skrll
470 1.1.1.3 christos #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld64.so.1"
471 1.1 skrll
472 1.1 skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
473 1.1 skrll copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
474 1.1 skrll section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
475 1.1 skrll shared lib. */
476 1.1 skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
477 1.1 skrll
478 1.1 skrll /* The size in bytes of the first entry in the procedure linkage table. */
479 1.1 skrll #define PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE 32
480 1.1 skrll /* The size in bytes of an entry in the procedure linkage table. */
481 1.1 skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 32
482 1.1 skrll
483 1.1 skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
484 1.1 skrll
485 1.1.1.3 christos #define RELA_ENTRY_SIZE sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)
486 1.1.1.3 christos
487 1.1.1.8 christos /* The first three entries in a global offset table are reserved,
488 1.1 skrll and the initial contents are unimportant (we zero them out).
489 1.1 skrll Subsequent entries look like this. See the SVR4 ABI 386
490 1.1 skrll supplement to see how this works. */
491 1.1 skrll
492 1.1 skrll /* For the s390, simple addr offset can only be 0 - 4096.
493 1.1 skrll To use the full 16777216 TB address space, several instructions
494 1.1 skrll are needed to load an address in a register and execute
495 1.1 skrll a branch( or just saving the address)
496 1.1 skrll
497 1.1 skrll Furthermore, only r 0 and 1 are free to use!!! */
498 1.1 skrll
499 1.1 skrll /* The first 3 words in the GOT are then reserved.
500 1.1 skrll Word 0 is the address of the dynamic table.
501 1.1 skrll Word 1 is a pointer to a structure describing the object
502 1.1 skrll Word 2 is used to point to the loader entry address.
503 1.1 skrll
504 1.1 skrll The code for PLT entries looks like this:
505 1.1 skrll
506 1.1 skrll The GOT holds the address in the PLT to be executed.
507 1.1 skrll The loader then gets:
508 1.1.1.5 christos 48(15) = Pointer to the structure describing the object.
509 1.1.1.5 christos 56(15) = Offset in symbol table
510 1.1 skrll The loader must then find the module where the function is
511 1.1 skrll and insert the address in the GOT.
512 1.1 skrll
513 1.1 skrll PLT1: LARL 1,<fn>@GOTENT # 6 bytes Load address of GOT entry in r1
514 1.1.1.6 christos LG 1,0(1) # 6 bytes Load address from GOT in r1
515 1.1.1.6 christos BCR 15,1 # 2 bytes Jump to address
516 1.1.1.6 christos RET1: BASR 1,0 # 2 bytes Return from GOT 1st time
517 1.1.1.8 christos LGF 1,12(1) # 6 bytes Load rela.plt offset into r1
518 1.1.1.8 christos BRCL 15,-x # 6 bytes Jump to first PLT entry
519 1.1.1.6 christos .long ? # 4 bytes offset into .rela.plt
520 1.1 skrll
521 1.1 skrll Total = 32 bytes per PLT entry
522 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 2: relative address to GOT entry
523 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 22: relative branch to PLT0
524 1.1.1.3 christos Fixup at offset 28: 32 bit offset into .rela.plt
525 1.1 skrll
526 1.1.1.3 christos A 32 bit offset into the symbol table is enough. It allows for
527 1.1.1.3 christos .rela.plt sections up to a size of 2 gigabyte. A single dynamic
528 1.1.1.3 christos object (the main program, any shared library) is limited to 4GB in
529 1.1.1.3 christos size. Having a .rela.plt of 2GB would already make the .plt
530 1.1.1.3 christos section bigger than 8GB. */
531 1.1.1.3 christos
532 1.1.1.3 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_plt_entry[PLT_ENTRY_SIZE] =
533 1.1.1.3 christos {
534 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* larl %r1,. */
535 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x04, /* lg %r1,0(%r1) */
536 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0xf1, /* br %r1 */
537 1.1.1.6 christos 0x0d, 0x10, /* basr %r1,%r0 */
538 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x14, /* lgf %r1,12(%r1) */
539 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0xf4, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* jg first plt */
540 1.1.1.6 christos 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00 /* .long 0x00000000 */
541 1.1.1.3 christos };
542 1.1 skrll
543 1.1 skrll /* The first PLT entry pushes the offset into the symbol table
544 1.1.1.3 christos from R1 onto the stack at 56(15) and the loader object info
545 1.1.1.3 christos at 48(15), loads the loader address in R1 and jumps to it. */
546 1.1 skrll
547 1.1 skrll /* The first entry in the PLT:
548 1.1 skrll
549 1.1 skrll PLT0:
550 1.1 skrll STG 1,56(15) # r1 contains the offset into the symbol table
551 1.1 skrll LARL 1,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE # load address of global offset table
552 1.1 skrll MVC 48(8,15),8(1) # move loader ino (object struct address) to stack
553 1.1 skrll LG 1,16(1) # get entry address of loader
554 1.1 skrll BCR 15,1 # jump to loader
555 1.1 skrll
556 1.1 skrll Fixup at offset 8: relative address to start of GOT. */
557 1.1 skrll
558 1.1.1.3 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_first_plt_entry[PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE] =
559 1.1.1.3 christos {
560 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0xf0, 0x38, 0x00, 0x24, /* stg %r1,56(%r15) */
561 1.1.1.6 christos 0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, /* larl %r1,. */
562 1.1.1.6 christos 0xd2, 0x07, 0xf0, 0x30, 0x10, 0x08, /* mvc 48(8,%r15),8(%r1) */
563 1.1.1.6 christos 0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x04, /* lg %r1,16(%r1) */
564 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0xf1, /* br %r1 */
565 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00, /* nopr %r0 */
566 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00, /* nopr %r0 */
567 1.1.1.6 christos 0x07, 0x00 /* nopr %r0 */
568 1.1.1.3 christos };
569 1.1 skrll
570 1.1.1.11 christos /* .eh_frame covering the .plt section. */
571 1.1.1.11 christos
572 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_CIE_SIZE 24
573 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_SIZE 20
574 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET (PLT_CIE_SIZE + 8)
575 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_FDE_LEN_OFFSET (PLT_CIE_SIZE + 12)
576 1.1.1.11 christos
577 1.1.1.11 christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt[] =
578 1.1.1.11 christos {
579 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_CIE_SIZE - 4, /* CIE length */
580 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* CIE ID */
581 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* CIE version */
582 1.1.1.11 christos 'z', 'R', 0, /* Augmentation string */
583 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Code alignment factor */
584 1.1.1.11 christos 0x78, /* Data alignment factor */
585 1.1.1.11 christos 14, /* Return address column */
586 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Augmentation size */
587 1.1.1.11 christos DW_EH_PE_pcrel | DW_EH_PE_sdata4, /* FDE encoding */
588 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_def_cfa, 15, 0xa0, 0x01, /* DW_CFA_def_cfa: r15 ofs 160 */
589 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop,
590 1.1.1.11 christos
591 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_FDE_SIZE - 4, /* FDE length */
592 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, PLT_CIE_SIZE + 4, /* CIE pointer */
593 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* R_S390_PC32 .plt goes here */
594 1.1.1.11 christos 0, 0, 0, 0, /* .plt size goes here */
595 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* Augmentation size */
596 1.1.1.11 christos DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop, DW_CFA_nop
597 1.1.1.11 christos };
598 1.1.1.11 christos
599 1.1.1.11 christos /* .sframe covering the .plt section. */
600 1.1.1.11 christos
601 1.1.1.11 christos /* This must be the same as sframe_get_hdr_size (sfh). For s390x, this value
602 1.1.1.11 christos is the same as sizeof (sframe_header) because there is no SFrame auxilliary
603 1.1.1.11 christos header. */
604 1.1.1.11 christos #define PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET sizeof (sframe_header)
605 1.1.1.11 christos
606 1.1.1.11 christos #define SFRAME_PLT0_MAX_NUM_FRES 1
607 1.1.1.11 christos #define SFRAME_PLTN_MAX_NUM_FRES 1
608 1.1.1.11 christos
609 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt
610 1.1.1.11 christos {
611 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_entry_size;
612 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_num_fres;
613 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry *plt0_fres[SFRAME_PLT0_MAX_NUM_FRES];
614 1.1.1.11 christos
615 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int pltn_entry_size;
616 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int pltn_num_fres;
617 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry *pltn_fres[SFRAME_PLTN_MAX_NUM_FRES];
618 1.1.1.11 christos };
619 1.1.1.11 christos
620 1.1.1.11 christos /* .sframe FRE covering the PLT0/PLTn .plt section entry. */
621 1.1.1.11 christos static const sframe_frame_row_entry elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre =
622 1.1.1.11 christos {
623 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* SFrame FRE start address. */
624 1.1.1.11 christos { SFRAME_V2_S390X_CFA_OFFSET_ENCODE (160), 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* Offset bytes. */
625 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_V1_FRE_INFO (SFRAME_BASE_REG_SP, 1, SFRAME_FRE_OFFSET_1B) /* FRE info. */
626 1.1.1.11 christos };
627 1.1.1.11 christos
628 1.1.1.11 christos /* SFrame helper object for PLT. */
629 1.1.1.11 christos static const struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt elf_s390x_sframe_plt =
630 1.1.1.11 christos {
631 1.1.1.11 christos PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE,
632 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Number of FREs for PLT0. */
633 1.1.1.11 christos /* Array of SFrame FREs for PLT0. */
634 1.1.1.11 christos { &elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre },
635 1.1.1.11 christos
636 1.1.1.11 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE,
637 1.1.1.11 christos 1, /* Number of FREs for PLTn. */
638 1.1.1.11 christos /* Array of SFrame FREs for PLTn. */
639 1.1.1.11 christos { &elf_s390x_sframe_plt_fre },
640 1.1.1.11 christos };
641 1.1.1.11 christos
642 1.1 skrll
643 1.1 skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash entry. */
644 1.1 skrll
645 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry
646 1.1 skrll {
647 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry elf;
648 1.1 skrll
649 1.1 skrll /* Number of GOTPLT references for a function. */
650 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma gotplt_refcount;
651 1.1 skrll
652 1.1 skrll #define GOT_UNKNOWN 0
653 1.1 skrll #define GOT_NORMAL 1
654 1.1 skrll #define GOT_TLS_GD 2
655 1.1 skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE 3
656 1.1 skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE_NLT 3
657 1.1 skrll unsigned char tls_type;
658 1.1.1.3 christos
659 1.1.1.3 christos /* For pointer equality reasons we might need to change the symbol
660 1.1.1.3 christos type from STT_GNU_IFUNC to STT_FUNC together with its value and
661 1.1.1.3 christos section entry. So after alloc_dynrelocs only these values should
662 1.1.1.3 christos be used. In order to check whether a symbol is IFUNC use
663 1.1.1.3 christos s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p. */
664 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma ifunc_resolver_address;
665 1.1.1.3 christos asection *ifunc_resolver_section;
666 1.1 skrll };
667 1.1 skrll
668 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_hash_entry(ent) \
669 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
670 1.1 skrll
671 1.1.1.3 christos /* This structure represents an entry in the local PLT list needed for
672 1.1.1.3 christos local IFUNC symbols. */
673 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry
674 1.1.1.3 christos {
675 1.1.1.3 christos /* The section of the local symbol.
676 1.1.1.3 christos Set in relocate_section and used in finish_dynamic_sections. */
677 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sec;
678 1.1.1.3 christos
679 1.1.1.3 christos union
680 1.1.1.3 christos {
681 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_signed_vma refcount;
682 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma offset;
683 1.1.1.3 christos } plt;
684 1.1.1.3 christos };
685 1.1.1.3 christos
686 1.1 skrll /* NOTE: Keep this structure in sync with
687 1.1 skrll the one declared in elf32-s390.c. */
688 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_obj_tdata
689 1.1 skrll {
690 1.1 skrll struct elf_obj_tdata root;
691 1.1 skrll
692 1.1.1.3 christos /* A local PLT is needed for ifunc symbols. */
693 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt;
694 1.1.1.3 christos
695 1.1 skrll /* TLS type for each local got entry. */
696 1.1 skrll char *local_got_tls_type;
697 1.1 skrll };
698 1.1 skrll
699 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_tdata(abfd) \
700 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_obj_tdata *) (abfd)->tdata.any)
701 1.1 skrll
702 1.1.1.3 christos #define elf_s390_local_plt(abfd) \
703 1.1.1.3 christos (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_plt)
704 1.1.1.3 christos
705 1.1 skrll #define elf_s390_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
706 1.1 skrll (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_got_tls_type)
707 1.1 skrll
708 1.1 skrll #define is_s390_elf(bfd) \
709 1.1 skrll (bfd_get_flavour (bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour \
710 1.1 skrll && elf_tdata (bfd) != NULL \
711 1.1.1.2 christos && elf_object_id (bfd) == S390_ELF_DATA)
712 1.1 skrll
713 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
714 1.1 skrll elf_s390_mkobject (bfd *abfd)
715 1.1 skrll {
716 1.1.1.11 christos return bfd_elf_allocate_object (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_s390_obj_tdata));
717 1.1 skrll }
718 1.1 skrll
719 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
720 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_object_p (bfd *abfd)
721 1.1 skrll {
722 1.1 skrll /* Set the right machine number for an s390 elf32 file. */
723 1.1 skrll return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_s390, bfd_mach_s390_64);
724 1.1 skrll }
725 1.1 skrll
726 1.1 skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash table. */
727 1.1 skrll
728 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table
729 1.1 skrll {
730 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_table elf;
731 1.1 skrll
732 1.1 skrll /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections. */
733 1.1.1.3 christos asection *irelifunc;
734 1.1.1.11 christos asection *plt_eh_frame;
735 1.1.1.11 christos
736 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx *plt_cfe_ctx;
737 1.1.1.11 christos asection *plt_sframe;
738 1.1.1.11 christos /* The .sframe helper object for .plt section. */
739 1.1.1.11 christos const struct elf_s390x_sframe_plt *sframe_plt;
740 1.1 skrll
741 1.1 skrll union {
742 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma refcount;
743 1.1 skrll bfd_vma offset;
744 1.1 skrll } tls_ldm_got;
745 1.1 skrll
746 1.1.1.6 christos /* Options passed from the linker. */
747 1.1.1.6 christos struct s390_elf_params *params;
748 1.1 skrll };
749 1.1 skrll
750 1.1 skrll /* Get the s390 ELF linker hash table from a link_info structure. */
751 1.1 skrll
752 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_s390_hash_table(p) \
753 1.1.1.9 christos ((is_elf_hash_table ((p)->hash) \
754 1.1.1.9 christos && elf_hash_table_id (elf_hash_table (p)) == S390_ELF_DATA) \
755 1.1.1.9 christos ? (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) (p)->hash : NULL)
756 1.1 skrll
757 1.1.1.3 christos #define ELF64 1
758 1.1.1.3 christos #include "elf-s390-common.c"
759 1.1.1.3 christos
760 1.1 skrll /* Create an entry in an s390 ELF linker hash table. */
761 1.1 skrll
762 1.1 skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
763 1.1.1.3 christos link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
764 1.1.1.3 christos struct bfd_hash_table *table,
765 1.1.1.3 christos const char *string)
766 1.1 skrll {
767 1.1 skrll /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
768 1.1 skrll subclass. */
769 1.1 skrll if (entry == NULL)
770 1.1 skrll {
771 1.1 skrll entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
772 1.1 skrll sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry));
773 1.1 skrll if (entry == NULL)
774 1.1 skrll return entry;
775 1.1 skrll }
776 1.1 skrll
777 1.1 skrll /* Call the allocation method of the superclass. */
778 1.1 skrll entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
779 1.1 skrll if (entry != NULL)
780 1.1 skrll {
781 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
782 1.1 skrll
783 1.1 skrll eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) entry;
784 1.1 skrll eh->gotplt_refcount = 0;
785 1.1 skrll eh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
786 1.1.1.3 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_address = 0;
787 1.1.1.3 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section = NULL;
788 1.1 skrll }
789 1.1 skrll
790 1.1 skrll return entry;
791 1.1 skrll }
792 1.1 skrll
793 1.1 skrll /* Create an s390 ELF linker hash table. */
794 1.1 skrll
795 1.1 skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
796 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
797 1.1 skrll {
798 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *ret;
799 1.1.1.9 christos size_t amt = sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table);
800 1.1 skrll
801 1.1.1.4 christos ret = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) bfd_zmalloc (amt);
802 1.1 skrll if (ret == NULL)
803 1.1 skrll return NULL;
804 1.1 skrll
805 1.1 skrll if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&ret->elf, abfd, link_hash_newfunc,
806 1.1.1.11 christos sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry)))
807 1.1 skrll {
808 1.1 skrll free (ret);
809 1.1 skrll return NULL;
810 1.1 skrll }
811 1.1 skrll
812 1.1 skrll return &ret->elf.root;
813 1.1 skrll }
814 1.1 skrll
815 1.1 skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry. */
816 1.1 skrll
817 1.1 skrll static void
818 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
819 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *dir,
820 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *ind)
821 1.1 skrll {
822 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *edir, *eind;
823 1.1 skrll
824 1.1 skrll edir = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) dir;
825 1.1 skrll eind = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) ind;
826 1.1 skrll
827 1.1 skrll if (ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
828 1.1 skrll && dir->got.refcount <= 0)
829 1.1 skrll {
830 1.1 skrll edir->tls_type = eind->tls_type;
831 1.1 skrll eind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
832 1.1 skrll }
833 1.1 skrll
834 1.1 skrll if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
835 1.1 skrll && ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
836 1.1 skrll && dir->dynamic_adjusted)
837 1.1 skrll {
838 1.1 skrll /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
839 1.1 skrll of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
840 1.1 skrll We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS. */
841 1.1.1.6 christos if (dir->versioned != versioned_hidden)
842 1.1.1.6 christos dir->ref_dynamic |= ind->ref_dynamic;
843 1.1 skrll dir->ref_regular |= ind->ref_regular;
844 1.1 skrll dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
845 1.1 skrll dir->needs_plt |= ind->needs_plt;
846 1.1 skrll }
847 1.1 skrll else
848 1.1 skrll _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, dir, ind);
849 1.1 skrll }
850 1.1 skrll
851 1.1 skrll static int
852 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_tls_transition (struct bfd_link_info *info,
853 1.1.1.3 christos int r_type,
854 1.1.1.3 christos int is_local)
855 1.1 skrll {
856 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info))
857 1.1 skrll return r_type;
858 1.1 skrll
859 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
860 1.1 skrll {
861 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64:
862 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64:
863 1.1 skrll if (is_local)
864 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64;
865 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_IE64;
866 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
867 1.1 skrll if (is_local)
868 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64;
869 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_GOTIE64;
870 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
871 1.1 skrll return R_390_TLS_LE64;
872 1.1 skrll }
873 1.1 skrll
874 1.1 skrll return r_type;
875 1.1 skrll }
876 1.1 skrll
877 1.1 skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
878 1.1 skrll allocate space in the global offset table or procedure linkage
879 1.1 skrll table. */
880 1.1 skrll
881 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
882 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
883 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info,
884 1.1.1.2 christos asection *sec,
885 1.1.1.2 christos const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
886 1.1 skrll {
887 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
888 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
889 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
890 1.1 skrll const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
891 1.1 skrll const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel_end;
892 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc;
893 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
894 1.1 skrll int tls_type, old_tls_type;
895 1.1 skrll
896 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
897 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
898 1.1 skrll
899 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (abfd));
900 1.1 skrll
901 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
902 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
903 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
904 1.1.1.2 christos
905 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd);
906 1.1 skrll sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
907 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
908 1.1 skrll
909 1.1 skrll sreloc = NULL;
910 1.1 skrll
911 1.1 skrll rel_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
912 1.1 skrll for (rel = relocs; rel < rel_end; rel++)
913 1.1 skrll {
914 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type;
915 1.1.1.6 christos unsigned int r_symndx;
916 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
917 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
918 1.1 skrll
919 1.1 skrll r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
920 1.1 skrll
921 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx >= NUM_SHDR_ENTRIES (symtab_hdr))
922 1.1 skrll {
923 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
924 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: bad symbol index: %d"),
925 1.1.1.6 christos abfd, r_symndx);
926 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
927 1.1 skrll }
928 1.1 skrll
929 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
930 1.1.1.3 christos {
931 1.1.1.3 christos /* A local symbol. */
932 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache,
933 1.1.1.3 christos abfd, r_symndx);
934 1.1.1.3 christos if (isym == NULL)
935 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
936 1.1.1.3 christos
937 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
938 1.1.1.3 christos {
939 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *plt;
940 1.1.1.3 christos
941 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
942 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
943 1.1.1.3 christos
944 1.1.1.3 christos if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
945 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
946 1.1.1.3 christos
947 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
948 1.1.1.3 christos {
949 1.1.1.3 christos if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
950 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
951 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
952 1.1.1.3 christos }
953 1.1.1.3 christos plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd);
954 1.1.1.3 christos plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount++;
955 1.1.1.3 christos }
956 1.1.1.3 christos h = NULL;
957 1.1.1.3 christos }
958 1.1 skrll else
959 1.1 skrll {
960 1.1 skrll h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
961 1.1 skrll while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
962 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
963 1.1 skrll h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link;
964 1.1 skrll }
965 1.1 skrll
966 1.1 skrll /* Create got section and local_got_refcounts array if they
967 1.1 skrll are needed. */
968 1.1 skrll r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info,
969 1.1 skrll ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info),
970 1.1 skrll h == NULL);
971 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
972 1.1 skrll {
973 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12:
974 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16:
975 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20:
976 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32:
977 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64:
978 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT:
979 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12:
980 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16:
981 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20:
982 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32:
983 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64:
984 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
985 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64:
986 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
987 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
988 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
989 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
990 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64:
991 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
992 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL
993 1.1 skrll && local_got_refcounts == NULL)
994 1.1 skrll {
995 1.1.1.3 christos if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
996 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
997 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
998 1.1 skrll }
999 1.1.1.3 christos
1000 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */
1001 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF16:
1002 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF32:
1003 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF64:
1004 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC:
1005 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
1006 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
1007 1.1 skrll {
1008 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
1009 1.1 skrll htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
1010 1.1.1.6 christos if (!_bfd_elf_create_got_section (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
1011 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1012 1.1 skrll }
1013 1.1 skrll }
1014 1.1 skrll
1015 1.1.1.3 christos if (h != NULL)
1016 1.1.1.3 christos {
1017 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
1018 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
1019 1.1.1.3 christos if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
1020 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1021 1.1.1.3 christos
1022 1.1.1.3 christos /* Make sure an IFUNC symbol defined in a non-shared object
1023 1.1.1.3 christos always gets a PLT slot. */
1024 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
1025 1.1.1.3 christos {
1026 1.1.1.3 christos /* The symbol is called by the dynamic loader in order
1027 1.1.1.3 christos to resolve the relocation. So it is in fact also
1028 1.1.1.3 christos referenced. */
1029 1.1.1.3 christos h->ref_regular = 1;
1030 1.1.1.3 christos h->needs_plt = 1;
1031 1.1.1.3 christos }
1032 1.1.1.3 christos }
1033 1.1.1.3 christos
1034 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
1035 1.1 skrll {
1036 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC:
1037 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
1038 1.1.1.3 christos /* These relocs do not need a GOT slot. They just load the
1039 1.1.1.3 christos GOT pointer itself or address something else relative to
1040 1.1.1.3 christos the GOT. Since the GOT pointer has been set up above we
1041 1.1.1.3 christos are done. */
1042 1.1 skrll break;
1043 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF16:
1044 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF32:
1045 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_GOTOFF64:
1046 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == NULL || !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) || !h->def_regular)
1047 1.1.1.4 christos break;
1048 1.1.1.6 christos /* Fall through. */
1049 1.1 skrll
1050 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT12DBL:
1051 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT16DBL:
1052 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT24DBL:
1053 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32:
1054 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32DBL:
1055 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT64:
1056 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF16:
1057 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF32:
1058 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF64:
1059 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires a procedure linkage table entry. We
1060 1.1 skrll actually build the entry in adjust_dynamic_symbol,
1061 1.1 skrll because this might be a case of linking PIC code which is
1062 1.1 skrll never referenced by a dynamic object, in which case we
1063 1.1 skrll don't need to generate a procedure linkage table entry
1064 1.1 skrll after all. */
1065 1.1 skrll
1066 1.1 skrll /* If this is a local symbol, we resolve it directly without
1067 1.1 skrll creating a procedure linkage table entry. */
1068 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1069 1.1 skrll {
1070 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 1;
1071 1.1 skrll h->plt.refcount += 1;
1072 1.1 skrll }
1073 1.1 skrll break;
1074 1.1 skrll
1075 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12:
1076 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16:
1077 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20:
1078 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32:
1079 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64:
1080 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
1081 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires either a procedure linkage table entry
1082 1.1 skrll or an entry in the local got. We actually build the entry
1083 1.1 skrll in adjust_dynamic_symbol because whether this is really a
1084 1.1 skrll global reference can change and with it the fact if we have
1085 1.1 skrll to create a plt entry or a local got entry. To be able to
1086 1.1 skrll make a once global symbol a local one we have to keep track
1087 1.1 skrll of the number of gotplt references that exist for this
1088 1.1 skrll symbol. */
1089 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1090 1.1 skrll {
1091 1.1 skrll ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount++;
1092 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 1;
1093 1.1 skrll h->plt.refcount += 1;
1094 1.1 skrll }
1095 1.1 skrll else
1096 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
1097 1.1 skrll break;
1098 1.1 skrll
1099 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
1100 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
1101 1.1 skrll break;
1102 1.1 skrll
1103 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64:
1104 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
1105 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
1106 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
1107 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
1108 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info))
1109 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
1110 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */
1111 1.1 skrll
1112 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12:
1113 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16:
1114 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20:
1115 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32:
1116 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64:
1117 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT:
1118 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64:
1119 1.1 skrll /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry. */
1120 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
1121 1.1 skrll {
1122 1.1 skrll default:
1123 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12:
1124 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16:
1125 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20:
1126 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32:
1127 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT:
1128 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
1129 1.1 skrll break;
1130 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64:
1131 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
1132 1.1 skrll break;
1133 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64:
1134 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
1135 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
1136 1.1 skrll break;
1137 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
1138 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
1139 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
1140 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE_NLT;
1141 1.1 skrll break;
1142 1.1 skrll }
1143 1.1 skrll
1144 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1145 1.1 skrll {
1146 1.1 skrll h->got.refcount += 1;
1147 1.1 skrll old_tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
1148 1.1 skrll }
1149 1.1 skrll else
1150 1.1 skrll {
1151 1.1 skrll local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
1152 1.1 skrll old_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
1153 1.1 skrll }
1154 1.1 skrll /* If a TLS symbol is accessed using IE at least once,
1155 1.1 skrll there is no point to use dynamic model for it. */
1156 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type != tls_type && old_tls_type != GOT_UNKNOWN)
1157 1.1 skrll {
1158 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type == GOT_NORMAL || tls_type == GOT_NORMAL)
1159 1.1 skrll {
1160 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler
1161 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
1162 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB: `%s' accessed both as normal and thread local symbol"),
1163 1.1 skrll abfd, h->root.root.string);
1164 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1165 1.1 skrll }
1166 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type > tls_type)
1167 1.1 skrll tls_type = old_tls_type;
1168 1.1 skrll }
1169 1.1 skrll
1170 1.1 skrll if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
1171 1.1 skrll {
1172 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1173 1.1 skrll elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->tls_type = tls_type;
1174 1.1 skrll else
1175 1.1 skrll elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
1176 1.1 skrll }
1177 1.1 skrll
1178 1.1 skrll if (r_type != R_390_TLS_IE64)
1179 1.1 skrll break;
1180 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */
1181 1.1 skrll
1182 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LE64:
1183 1.1.1.4 christos /* For static linking and executables this reloc will be
1184 1.1.1.4 christos calculated at linktime otherwise a TLS_TPOFF runtime
1185 1.1.1.4 christos reloc will be generated. */
1186 1.1.1.4 christos if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64 && bfd_link_pie (info))
1187 1.1.1.4 christos break;
1188 1.1.1.4 christos
1189 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info))
1190 1.1 skrll break;
1191 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
1192 1.1 skrll /* Fall through */
1193 1.1 skrll
1194 1.1 skrll case R_390_8:
1195 1.1 skrll case R_390_16:
1196 1.1 skrll case R_390_32:
1197 1.1 skrll case R_390_64:
1198 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC12DBL:
1199 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16:
1200 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16DBL:
1201 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC24DBL:
1202 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32:
1203 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32DBL:
1204 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC64:
1205 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL && bfd_link_executable (info))
1206 1.1 skrll {
1207 1.1 skrll /* If this reloc is in a read-only section, we might
1208 1.1 skrll need a copy reloc. We can't check reliably at this
1209 1.1 skrll stage whether the section is read-only, as input
1210 1.1 skrll sections have not yet been mapped to output sections.
1211 1.1 skrll Tentatively set the flag for now, and correct in
1212 1.1 skrll adjust_dynamic_symbol. */
1213 1.1 skrll h->non_got_ref = 1;
1214 1.1 skrll
1215 1.1.1.4 christos if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
1216 1.1.1.3 christos {
1217 1.1.1.3 christos /* We may need a .plt entry if the function this reloc
1218 1.1.1.3 christos refers to is in a shared lib. */
1219 1.1.1.3 christos h->plt.refcount += 1;
1220 1.1.1.3 christos }
1221 1.1 skrll }
1222 1.1 skrll
1223 1.1 skrll /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
1224 1.1 skrll against a global symbol, or a non PC relative reloc
1225 1.1 skrll against a local symbol, then we need to copy the reloc
1226 1.1 skrll into the shared library. However, if we are linking with
1227 1.1 skrll -Bsymbolic, we do not need to copy a reloc against a
1228 1.1 skrll global symbol which is defined in an object we are
1229 1.1 skrll including in the link (i.e., DEF_REGULAR is set). At
1230 1.1 skrll this point we have not seen all the input files, so it is
1231 1.1 skrll possible that DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set
1232 1.1 skrll later (it is never cleared). In case of a weak definition,
1233 1.1 skrll DEF_REGULAR may be cleared later by a strong definition in
1234 1.1 skrll a shared library. We account for that possibility below by
1235 1.1 skrll storing information in the relocs_copied field of the hash
1236 1.1 skrll table entry. A similar situation occurs when creating
1237 1.1 skrll shared libraries and symbol visibility changes render the
1238 1.1 skrll symbol local.
1239 1.1 skrll
1240 1.1 skrll If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
1241 1.1 skrll may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
1242 1.1 skrll dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
1243 1.1 skrll symbol. */
1244 1.1.1.4 christos if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
1245 1.1 skrll && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
1246 1.1 skrll && ((ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16
1247 1.1.1.4 christos && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC12DBL
1248 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16DBL
1249 1.1.1.4 christos && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC24DBL
1250 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32
1251 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32DBL
1252 1.1 skrll && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC64)
1253 1.1 skrll || (h != NULL
1254 1.1.1.2 christos && (! SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
1255 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
1256 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular))))
1257 1.1 skrll || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
1258 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_pic (info)
1259 1.1 skrll && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
1260 1.1 skrll && h != NULL
1261 1.1 skrll && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
1262 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular)))
1263 1.1 skrll {
1264 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
1265 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **head;
1266 1.1 skrll
1267 1.1 skrll /* We must copy these reloc types into the output file.
1268 1.1 skrll Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
1269 1.1 skrll this reloc. */
1270 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL)
1271 1.1 skrll {
1272 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
1273 1.1 skrll htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
1274 1.1 skrll
1275 1.1.1.2 christos sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
1276 1.1.1.9 christos (sec, htab->elf.dynobj, 3, abfd, /*rela?*/ true);
1277 1.1 skrll
1278 1.1.1.2 christos if (sreloc == NULL)
1279 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1280 1.1 skrll }
1281 1.1 skrll
1282 1.1 skrll /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
1283 1.1 skrll relocations we need for this symbol. */
1284 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1285 1.1 skrll {
1286 1.1.1.9 christos head = &h->dyn_relocs;
1287 1.1 skrll }
1288 1.1 skrll else
1289 1.1 skrll {
1290 1.1 skrll /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
1291 1.1 skrll We really need local syms available to do this
1292 1.1 skrll easily. Oh well. */
1293 1.1 skrll asection *s;
1294 1.1 skrll void *vpp;
1295 1.1 skrll
1296 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache,
1297 1.1.1.2 christos abfd, r_symndx);
1298 1.1.1.2 christos if (isym == NULL)
1299 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1300 1.1 skrll
1301 1.1.1.2 christos s = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
1302 1.1.1.2 christos if (s == NULL)
1303 1.1.1.2 christos s = sec;
1304 1.1.1.2 christos
1305 1.1 skrll vpp = &elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel;
1306 1.1.1.3 christos head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
1307 1.1 skrll }
1308 1.1 skrll
1309 1.1 skrll p = *head;
1310 1.1 skrll if (p == NULL || p->sec != sec)
1311 1.1 skrll {
1312 1.1.1.9 christos size_t amt = sizeof *p;
1313 1.1.1.3 christos p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
1314 1.1 skrll bfd_alloc (htab->elf.dynobj, amt));
1315 1.1 skrll if (p == NULL)
1316 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1317 1.1 skrll p->next = *head;
1318 1.1 skrll *head = p;
1319 1.1 skrll p->sec = sec;
1320 1.1 skrll p->count = 0;
1321 1.1 skrll p->pc_count = 0;
1322 1.1 skrll }
1323 1.1 skrll
1324 1.1 skrll p->count += 1;
1325 1.1 skrll if (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16
1326 1.1.1.4 christos || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC12DBL
1327 1.1.1.4 christos || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
1328 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
1329 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32
1330 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32DBL
1331 1.1 skrll || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC64)
1332 1.1 skrll p->pc_count += 1;
1333 1.1 skrll }
1334 1.1 skrll break;
1335 1.1 skrll
1336 1.1 skrll /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
1337 1.1 skrll Reconstruct it for later use during GC. */
1338 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
1339 1.1 skrll if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_offset))
1340 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1341 1.1 skrll break;
1342 1.1 skrll
1343 1.1 skrll /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
1344 1.1 skrll used. Record for later use during GC. */
1345 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
1346 1.1.1.8 christos if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_addend))
1347 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1348 1.1 skrll break;
1349 1.1 skrll
1350 1.1 skrll default:
1351 1.1 skrll break;
1352 1.1 skrll }
1353 1.1 skrll }
1354 1.1 skrll
1355 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1356 1.1 skrll }
1357 1.1 skrll
1358 1.1 skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against GC for a given
1359 1.1 skrll relocation. */
1360 1.1 skrll
1361 1.1 skrll static asection *
1362 1.1 skrll elf_s390_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
1363 1.1 skrll struct bfd_link_info *info,
1364 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela *rel,
1365 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
1366 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
1367 1.1 skrll {
1368 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
1369 1.1 skrll switch (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
1370 1.1 skrll {
1371 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
1372 1.1 skrll case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
1373 1.1 skrll return NULL;
1374 1.1 skrll }
1375 1.1 skrll
1376 1.1 skrll return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rel, h, sym);
1377 1.1 skrll }
1378 1.1 skrll
1379 1.1 skrll /* Make sure we emit a GOT entry if the symbol was supposed to have a PLT
1380 1.1 skrll entry but we found we will not create any. Called when we find we will
1381 1.1 skrll not have any PLT for this symbol, by for example
1382 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol when we're doing a proper dynamic link,
1383 1.1.1.11 christos or elf_s390_late_size_sections if no dynamic sections will be
1384 1.1 skrll created (we're only linking static objects). */
1385 1.1 skrll
1386 1.1 skrll static void
1387 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_adjust_gotplt (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *h)
1388 1.1 skrll {
1389 1.1 skrll if (h->elf.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
1390 1.1 skrll h = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h->elf.root.u.i.link;
1391 1.1 skrll
1392 1.1 skrll if (h->gotplt_refcount <= 0)
1393 1.1 skrll return;
1394 1.1 skrll
1395 1.1 skrll /* We simply add the number of gotplt references to the number
1396 1.1 skrll * of got references for this symbol. */
1397 1.1 skrll h->elf.got.refcount += h->gotplt_refcount;
1398 1.1 skrll h->gotplt_refcount = -1;
1399 1.1 skrll }
1400 1.1 skrll
1401 1.1 skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
1402 1.1 skrll regular object. The current definition is in some section of the
1403 1.1 skrll dynamic object, but we're not including those sections. We have to
1404 1.1 skrll change the definition to something the rest of the link can
1405 1.1 skrll understand. */
1406 1.1 skrll
1407 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
1408 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
1409 1.1.1.2 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h)
1410 1.1 skrll {
1411 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
1412 1.1.1.6 christos asection *s, *srel;
1413 1.1 skrll
1414 1.1.1.3 christos /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT. */
1415 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
1416 1.1.1.4 christos {
1417 1.1.1.4 christos /* All local STT_GNU_IFUNC references must be treated as local
1418 1.1.1.4 christos calls via local PLT. */
1419 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->ref_regular && SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
1420 1.1.1.4 christos {
1421 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_size_type pc_count = 0, count = 0;
1422 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
1423 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
1424 1.1.1.4 christos
1425 1.1.1.9 christos for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
1426 1.1.1.4 christos {
1427 1.1.1.4 christos pc_count += p->pc_count;
1428 1.1.1.4 christos p->count -= p->pc_count;
1429 1.1.1.4 christos p->pc_count = 0;
1430 1.1.1.4 christos count += p->count;
1431 1.1.1.4 christos if (p->count == 0)
1432 1.1.1.4 christos *pp = p->next;
1433 1.1.1.4 christos else
1434 1.1.1.4 christos pp = &p->next;
1435 1.1.1.4 christos }
1436 1.1.1.4 christos
1437 1.1.1.4 christos if (pc_count || count)
1438 1.1.1.4 christos {
1439 1.1.1.4 christos h->needs_plt = 1;
1440 1.1.1.4 christos h->non_got_ref = 1;
1441 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
1442 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.refcount = 1;
1443 1.1.1.4 christos else
1444 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.refcount += 1;
1445 1.1.1.4 christos }
1446 1.1.1.4 christos }
1447 1.1.1.4 christos
1448 1.1.1.4 christos if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
1449 1.1.1.4 christos {
1450 1.1.1.4 christos h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1451 1.1.1.4 christos h->needs_plt = 0;
1452 1.1.1.4 christos }
1453 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1454 1.1.1.4 christos }
1455 1.1.1.3 christos
1456 1.1 skrll /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table. We
1457 1.1 skrll will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later
1458 1.1 skrll (although we could actually do it here). */
1459 1.1 skrll if (h->type == STT_FUNC
1460 1.1 skrll || h->needs_plt)
1461 1.1 skrll {
1462 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.refcount <= 0
1463 1.1.1.2 christos || SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)
1464 1.1.1.6 christos || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
1465 1.1 skrll {
1466 1.1 skrll /* This case can occur if we saw a PLT32 reloc in an input
1467 1.1 skrll file, but the symbol was never referred to by a dynamic
1468 1.1 skrll object, or if all references were garbage collected. In
1469 1.1 skrll such a case, we don't actually need to build a procedure
1470 1.1 skrll linkage table, and we can just do a PC32 reloc instead. */
1471 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1472 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0;
1473 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
1474 1.1 skrll }
1475 1.1 skrll
1476 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1477 1.1 skrll }
1478 1.1 skrll else
1479 1.1 skrll /* It's possible that we incorrectly decided a .plt reloc was
1480 1.1 skrll needed for an R_390_PC32 reloc to a non-function sym in
1481 1.1 skrll check_relocs. We can't decide accurately between function and
1482 1.1 skrll non-function syms in check-relocs; Objects loaded later in
1483 1.1 skrll the link may change h->type. So fix it now. */
1484 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1485 1.1 skrll
1486 1.1 skrll /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
1487 1.1 skrll processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
1488 1.1 skrll real definition first, and we can just use the same value. */
1489 1.1.1.6 christos if (h->is_weakalias)
1490 1.1 skrll {
1491 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (h);
1492 1.1.1.6 christos BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
1493 1.1.1.6 christos h->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
1494 1.1.1.6 christos h->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
1495 1.1 skrll if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS || info->nocopyreloc)
1496 1.1.1.6 christos h->non_got_ref = def->non_got_ref;
1497 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1498 1.1 skrll }
1499 1.1 skrll
1500 1.1 skrll /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
1501 1.1 skrll is not a function. */
1502 1.1 skrll
1503 1.1 skrll /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
1504 1.1 skrll only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
1505 1.1 skrll For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
1506 1.1 skrll be handled correctly by relocate_section. */
1507 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info))
1508 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1509 1.1 skrll
1510 1.1 skrll /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
1511 1.1 skrll GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc. */
1512 1.1 skrll if (!h->non_got_ref)
1513 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1514 1.1 skrll
1515 1.1 skrll /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either. */
1516 1.1 skrll if (info->nocopyreloc)
1517 1.1 skrll {
1518 1.1 skrll h->non_got_ref = 0;
1519 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1520 1.1 skrll }
1521 1.1 skrll
1522 1.1.1.6 christos /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
1523 1.1.1.6 christos we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc. */
1524 1.1.1.9 christos if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS && !_bfd_elf_readonly_dynrelocs (h))
1525 1.1 skrll {
1526 1.1.1.6 christos h->non_got_ref = 0;
1527 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1528 1.1 skrll }
1529 1.1 skrll
1530 1.1 skrll /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
1531 1.1 skrll become part of the .bss section of the executable. There will be
1532 1.1 skrll an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section. The dynamic
1533 1.1 skrll object will contain position independent code, so all references
1534 1.1 skrll from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
1535 1.1 skrll offset table. The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
1536 1.1 skrll determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
1537 1.1 skrll both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
1538 1.1 skrll same memory location for the variable. */
1539 1.1 skrll
1540 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
1541 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
1542 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1543 1.1 skrll
1544 1.1 skrll /* We must generate a R_390_COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
1545 1.1 skrll copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
1546 1.1 skrll runtime process image. */
1547 1.1.1.6 christos if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
1548 1.1.1.6 christos {
1549 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sdynrelro;
1550 1.1.1.6 christos srel = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
1551 1.1.1.6 christos }
1552 1.1.1.6 christos else
1553 1.1.1.6 christos {
1554 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sdynbss;
1555 1.1.1.6 christos srel = htab->elf.srelbss;
1556 1.1.1.6 christos }
1557 1.1.1.3 christos if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && h->size != 0)
1558 1.1 skrll {
1559 1.1.1.6 christos srel->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1560 1.1 skrll h->needs_copy = 1;
1561 1.1 skrll }
1562 1.1 skrll
1563 1.1.1.4 christos return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, h, s);
1564 1.1 skrll }
1565 1.1 skrll
1566 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create SFrame stack trace info for the PLT entries in the .plt section. */
1567 1.1.1.11 christos
1568 1.1.1.11 christos static bool
1569 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_create_sframe_plt (struct bfd_link_info *info)
1570 1.1.1.11 christos {
1571 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
1572 1.1.1.11 christos
1573 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int plt0_entry_size;
1574 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned char func_info;
1575 1.1.1.11 christos uint32_t fre_type;
1576 1.1.1.11 christos /* The dynamic plt section for which .sframe stack trace information is being
1577 1.1.1.11 christos created. */
1578 1.1.1.11 christos asection *dpltsec;
1579 1.1.1.11 christos
1580 1.1.1.11 christos int err = 0;
1581 1.1.1.11 christos
1582 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx **ectx = NULL;
1583 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned plt_entry_size = 0;
1584 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_pltn_fres = 0;
1585 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_pltn_entries = 0;
1586 1.1.1.11 christos const sframe_frame_row_entry * const *pltn_fres;
1587 1.1.1.11 christos
1588 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
1589 1.1.1.11 christos ectx = &htab->plt_cfe_ctx;
1590 1.1.1.11 christos dpltsec = htab->elf.splt;
1591 1.1.1.11 christos
1592 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size = htab->sframe_plt->plt0_entry_size;
1593 1.1.1.11 christos plt_entry_size = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_entry_size;
1594 1.1.1.11 christos pltn_fres = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_fres;
1595 1.1.1.11 christos num_pltn_fres = htab->sframe_plt->pltn_num_fres;
1596 1.1.1.11 christos num_pltn_entries = (dpltsec->size - plt0_entry_size) / plt_entry_size;
1597 1.1.1.11 christos
1598 1.1.1.11 christos *ectx = sframe_encode (SFRAME_VERSION_2,
1599 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_F_FDE_FUNC_START_PCREL,
1600 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_ABI_S390X_ENDIAN_BIG,
1601 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_CFA_FIXED_FP_INVALID,
1602 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_CFA_FIXED_RA_INVALID,
1603 1.1.1.11 christos &err);
1604 1.1.1.11 christos
1605 1.1.1.11 christos /* FRE type is dependent on the size of the function. */
1606 1.1.1.11 christos fre_type = sframe_calc_fre_type (dpltsec->size);
1607 1.1.1.11 christos func_info = sframe_fde_create_func_info (fre_type, SFRAME_FDE_TYPE_PCINC);
1608 1.1.1.11 christos
1609 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add SFrame FDE and the associated FREs for PLT0 if PLT0 has been
1610 1.1.1.11 christos generated. */
1611 1.1.1.11 christos if (plt0_entry_size)
1612 1.1.1.11 christos {
1613 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add SFrame FDE for PLT0, the function start address is updated later
1614 1.1.1.11 christos at _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe time. */
1615 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_funcdesc_v2 (*ectx,
1616 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* func start addr. */
1617 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size,
1618 1.1.1.11 christos func_info,
1619 1.1.1.11 christos 0, /* Rep block size. */
1620 1.1.1.11 christos 0 /* Num FREs. */);
1621 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_frame_row_entry plt0_fre;
1622 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int num_plt0_fres = htab->sframe_plt->plt0_num_fres;
1623 1.1.1.11 christos for (unsigned int j = 0; j < num_plt0_fres; j++)
1624 1.1.1.11 christos {
1625 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_fre = *(htab->sframe_plt->plt0_fres[j]);
1626 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_fre (*ectx, 0, &plt0_fre);
1627 1.1.1.11 christos }
1628 1.1.1.11 christos }
1629 1.1.1.11 christos
1630 1.1.1.11 christos if (num_pltn_entries)
1631 1.1.1.11 christos {
1632 1.1.1.11 christos /* PLTn entries use an SFrame FDE of type
1633 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_FDE_TYPE_PCMASK to exploit the repetitive
1634 1.1.1.11 christos pattern of the instructions in these entries. Using this SFrame FDE
1635 1.1.1.11 christos type helps in keeping the SFrame stack trace info for PLTn entries
1636 1.1.1.11 christos compact. */
1637 1.1.1.11 christos func_info = sframe_fde_create_func_info (fre_type,
1638 1.1.1.11 christos SFRAME_FDE_TYPE_PCMASK);
1639 1.1.1.11 christos /* Add the SFrame FDE for all PCs starting at the first PLTn entry (hence,
1640 1.1.1.11 christos function start address = plt0_entry_size. As usual, this will be
1641 1.1.1.11 christos updated later at _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe, by when the
1642 1.1.1.11 christos sections are relocated. */
1643 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_funcdesc_v2 (*ectx,
1644 1.1.1.11 christos plt0_entry_size, /* func start addr. */
1645 1.1.1.11 christos dpltsec->size - plt0_entry_size,
1646 1.1.1.11 christos func_info,
1647 1.1.1.11 christos plt_entry_size,
1648 1.1.1.11 christos 0 /* Num FREs. */);
1649 1.1.1.11 christos
1650 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_frame_row_entry pltn_fre;
1651 1.1.1.11 christos /* Now add the FREs for PLTn. Simply adding the FREs suffices due
1652 1.1.1.11 christos to the usage of SFRAME_FDE_TYPE_PCMASK above. */
1653 1.1.1.11 christos for (unsigned int j = 0; j < num_pltn_fres; j++)
1654 1.1.1.11 christos {
1655 1.1.1.11 christos unsigned int func_idx = plt0_entry_size ? 1 : 0;
1656 1.1.1.11 christos pltn_fre = *(pltn_fres[j]);
1657 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_add_fre (*ectx, func_idx, &pltn_fre);
1658 1.1.1.11 christos }
1659 1.1.1.11 christos }
1660 1.1.1.11 christos
1661 1.1.1.11 christos return true;
1662 1.1.1.11 christos }
1663 1.1.1.11 christos
1664 1.1.1.11 christos /* Write contents of the .sframe section. */
1665 1.1.1.11 christos
1666 1.1.1.11 christos static bool
1667 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_write_sframe_plt (struct bfd_link_info *info)
1668 1.1.1.11 christos {
1669 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
1670 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_ctx *ectx;
1671 1.1.1.11 christos size_t sec_size;
1672 1.1.1.11 christos asection *sec;
1673 1.1.1.11 christos bfd *dynobj;
1674 1.1.1.11 christos
1675 1.1.1.11 christos int err = 0;
1676 1.1.1.11 christos
1677 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
1678 1.1.1.11 christos dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
1679 1.1.1.11 christos
1680 1.1.1.11 christos ectx = htab->plt_cfe_ctx;
1681 1.1.1.11 christos sec = htab->plt_sframe;
1682 1.1.1.11 christos
1683 1.1.1.11 christos BFD_ASSERT (ectx);
1684 1.1.1.11 christos
1685 1.1.1.11 christos void *contents = sframe_encoder_write (ectx, &sec_size, &err);
1686 1.1.1.11 christos
1687 1.1.1.11 christos sec->size = (bfd_size_type) sec_size;
1688 1.1.1.11 christos sec->contents = (unsigned char *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
1689 1.1.1.11 christos sec->alloced = 1;
1690 1.1.1.11 christos memcpy (sec->contents, contents, sec_size);
1691 1.1.1.11 christos
1692 1.1.1.11 christos sframe_encoder_free (&ectx);
1693 1.1.1.11 christos
1694 1.1.1.11 christos return true;
1695 1.1.1.11 christos }
1696 1.1.1.11 christos
1697 1.1 skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
1698 1.1 skrll dynamic relocs. */
1699 1.1 skrll
1700 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
1701 1.1.1.2 christos allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
1702 1.1.1.2 christos void * inf)
1703 1.1 skrll {
1704 1.1 skrll struct bfd_link_info *info;
1705 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
1706 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
1707 1.1 skrll
1708 1.1 skrll if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
1709 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1710 1.1 skrll
1711 1.1 skrll info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
1712 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
1713 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
1714 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1715 1.1 skrll
1716 1.1.1.3 christos /* Since STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT, we handle it
1717 1.1.1.3 christos here if it is defined and referenced in a non-shared object. */
1718 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
1719 1.1.1.4 christos return s390_elf_allocate_ifunc_dyn_relocs (info, h);
1720 1.1.1.3 christos else if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
1721 1.1.1.3 christos && h->plt.refcount > 0)
1722 1.1 skrll {
1723 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
1724 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */
1725 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1
1726 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local)
1727 1.1 skrll {
1728 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
1729 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1730 1.1 skrll }
1731 1.1 skrll
1732 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info)
1733 1.1 skrll || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, 0, h))
1734 1.1 skrll {
1735 1.1.1.3 christos asection *s = htab->elf.splt;
1736 1.1 skrll
1737 1.1 skrll /* If this is the first .plt entry, make room for the special
1738 1.1 skrll first entry. */
1739 1.1 skrll if (s->size == 0)
1740 1.1 skrll s->size += PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE;
1741 1.1 skrll
1742 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = s->size;
1743 1.1 skrll
1744 1.1 skrll /* If this symbol is not defined in a regular file, and we are
1745 1.1 skrll not generating a shared library, then set the symbol to this
1746 1.1 skrll location in the .plt. This is required to make function
1747 1.1 skrll pointers compare as equal between the normal executable and
1748 1.1 skrll the shared library. */
1749 1.1.1.4 christos if (! bfd_link_pic (info)
1750 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular)
1751 1.1 skrll {
1752 1.1 skrll h->root.u.def.section = s;
1753 1.1 skrll h->root.u.def.value = h->plt.offset;
1754 1.1 skrll }
1755 1.1 skrll
1756 1.1 skrll /* Make room for this entry. */
1757 1.1 skrll s->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1758 1.1 skrll
1759 1.1.1.8 christos /* We also need to make an entry in the .got.plt section. */
1760 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1761 1.1 skrll
1762 1.1 skrll /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section. */
1763 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1764 1.1 skrll }
1765 1.1 skrll else
1766 1.1 skrll {
1767 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1768 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0;
1769 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
1770 1.1 skrll }
1771 1.1 skrll }
1772 1.1 skrll else
1773 1.1 skrll {
1774 1.1 skrll h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1775 1.1 skrll h->needs_plt = 0;
1776 1.1 skrll elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
1777 1.1 skrll }
1778 1.1 skrll
1779 1.1 skrll /* If R_390_TLS_{IE64,GOTIE64,GOTIE12,IEENT} symbol is now local to
1780 1.1 skrll the binary, we can optimize a bit. IE64 and GOTIE64 get converted
1781 1.1 skrll to R_390_TLS_LE64 requiring no TLS entry. For GOTIE12 and IEENT
1782 1.1 skrll we can save the dynamic TLS relocation. */
1783 1.1 skrll if (h->got.refcount > 0
1784 1.1.1.9 christos && !bfd_link_dll (info)
1785 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx == -1
1786 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
1787 1.1 skrll {
1788 1.1 skrll if (elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type == GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
1789 1.1 skrll /* For the GOTIE access without a literal pool entry the offset has
1790 1.1 skrll to be stored somewhere. The immediate value in the instruction
1791 1.1 skrll is not bit enough so the value is stored in the got. */
1792 1.1 skrll {
1793 1.1.1.3 christos h->got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
1794 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1795 1.1 skrll }
1796 1.1 skrll else
1797 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1798 1.1 skrll }
1799 1.1 skrll else if (h->got.refcount > 0)
1800 1.1 skrll {
1801 1.1 skrll asection *s;
1802 1.1.1.9 christos bool dyn;
1803 1.1 skrll int tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
1804 1.1 skrll
1805 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
1806 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */
1807 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1
1808 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local)
1809 1.1 skrll {
1810 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
1811 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1812 1.1 skrll }
1813 1.1 skrll
1814 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.sgot;
1815 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = s->size;
1816 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1817 1.1 skrll /* R_390_TLS_GD64 needs 2 consecutive GOT slots. */
1818 1.1 skrll if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
1819 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1820 1.1 skrll dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
1821 1.1 skrll /* R_390_TLS_IE64 needs one dynamic relocation,
1822 1.1 skrll R_390_TLS_GD64 needs one if local symbol and two if global. */
1823 1.1 skrll if ((tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD && h->dynindx == -1)
1824 1.1 skrll || tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
1825 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1826 1.1 skrll else if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
1827 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1828 1.1.1.6 christos else if (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)
1829 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_link_pic (info)
1830 1.1 skrll || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 0, h)))
1831 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1832 1.1 skrll }
1833 1.1 skrll else
1834 1.1 skrll h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
1835 1.1 skrll
1836 1.1.1.9 christos if (h->dyn_relocs == NULL)
1837 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1838 1.1 skrll
1839 1.1 skrll /* In the shared -Bsymbolic case, discard space allocated for
1840 1.1 skrll dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols which turn out to be
1841 1.1 skrll defined in regular objects. For the normal shared case, discard
1842 1.1 skrll space for pc-relative relocs that have become local due to symbol
1843 1.1 skrll visibility changes. */
1844 1.1 skrll
1845 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info))
1846 1.1 skrll {
1847 1.1.1.2 christos if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
1848 1.1 skrll {
1849 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
1850 1.1 skrll
1851 1.1.1.9 christos for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
1852 1.1 skrll {
1853 1.1 skrll p->count -= p->pc_count;
1854 1.1 skrll p->pc_count = 0;
1855 1.1 skrll if (p->count == 0)
1856 1.1 skrll *pp = p->next;
1857 1.1 skrll else
1858 1.1 skrll pp = &p->next;
1859 1.1 skrll }
1860 1.1 skrll }
1861 1.1 skrll
1862 1.1 skrll /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
1863 1.1 skrll visibility. */
1864 1.1.1.9 christos if (h->dyn_relocs != NULL
1865 1.1 skrll && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
1866 1.1 skrll {
1867 1.1.1.6 christos if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT
1868 1.1.1.6 christos || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
1869 1.1.1.9 christos h->dyn_relocs = NULL;
1870 1.1 skrll
1871 1.1 skrll /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
1872 1.1 skrll symbol in PIEs. */
1873 1.1 skrll else if (h->dynindx == -1
1874 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local)
1875 1.1 skrll {
1876 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
1877 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1878 1.1 skrll }
1879 1.1 skrll }
1880 1.1 skrll }
1881 1.1 skrll else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
1882 1.1 skrll {
1883 1.1 skrll /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
1884 1.1 skrll symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
1885 1.1 skrll dynamic. */
1886 1.1 skrll
1887 1.1 skrll if (!h->non_got_ref
1888 1.1 skrll && ((h->def_dynamic
1889 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular)
1890 1.1 skrll || (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
1891 1.1 skrll && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
1892 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
1893 1.1 skrll {
1894 1.1 skrll /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
1895 1.1 skrll Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic. */
1896 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1
1897 1.1 skrll && !h->forced_local)
1898 1.1 skrll {
1899 1.1 skrll if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
1900 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1901 1.1 skrll }
1902 1.1 skrll
1903 1.1 skrll /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
1904 1.1 skrll relocs. */
1905 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx != -1)
1906 1.1 skrll goto keep;
1907 1.1 skrll }
1908 1.1 skrll
1909 1.1.1.9 christos h->dyn_relocs = NULL;
1910 1.1 skrll
1911 1.1 skrll keep: ;
1912 1.1 skrll }
1913 1.1 skrll
1914 1.1 skrll /* Finally, allocate space. */
1915 1.1.1.9 christos for (p = h->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
1916 1.1 skrll {
1917 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
1918 1.1 skrll sreloc->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
1919 1.1 skrll }
1920 1.1 skrll
1921 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
1922 1.1 skrll }
1923 1.1 skrll
1924 1.1 skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections. */
1925 1.1 skrll
1926 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
1927 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390_late_size_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1928 1.1.1.11 christos struct bfd_link_info *info)
1929 1.1 skrll {
1930 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
1931 1.1 skrll bfd *dynobj;
1932 1.1 skrll asection *s;
1933 1.1.1.9 christos bool relocs;
1934 1.1 skrll bfd *ibfd;
1935 1.1 skrll
1936 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
1937 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
1938 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
1939 1.1.1.2 christos
1940 1.1 skrll dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
1941 1.1 skrll if (dynobj == NULL)
1942 1.1.1.11 christos return true;
1943 1.1 skrll
1944 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
1945 1.1 skrll {
1946 1.1 skrll /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter. */
1947 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
1948 1.1 skrll {
1949 1.1.1.3 christos s = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
1950 1.1 skrll if (s == NULL)
1951 1.1 skrll abort ();
1952 1.1 skrll s->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
1953 1.1 skrll s->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
1954 1.1.1.11 christos s->alloced = 1;
1955 1.1 skrll }
1956 1.1 skrll }
1957 1.1 skrll
1958 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.sgot && s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info))
1959 1.1.1.8 christos {
1960 1.1.1.8 christos /* _bfd_elf_create_got_section adds the got header size always
1961 1.1.1.8 christos to .got.plt but we need it in .got if this section comes
1962 1.1.1.8 christos first. */
1963 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1964 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->size -= 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
1965 1.1.1.8 christos
1966 1.1.1.8 christos /* Make the _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ symbol point to the .got
1967 1.1.1.8 christos instead of .got.plt. */
1968 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section = htab->elf.sgot;
1969 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.value = 0;
1970 1.1.1.8 christos }
1971 1.1.1.8 christos
1972 1.1 skrll /* Set up .got offsets for local syms, and space for local dynamic
1973 1.1 skrll relocs. */
1974 1.1.1.4 christos for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
1975 1.1 skrll {
1976 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
1977 1.1 skrll bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
1978 1.1 skrll char *local_tls_type;
1979 1.1 skrll bfd_size_type locsymcount;
1980 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
1981 1.1 skrll asection *srela;
1982 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt;
1983 1.1.1.3 christos unsigned int i;
1984 1.1 skrll
1985 1.1 skrll if (! is_s390_elf (ibfd))
1986 1.1 skrll continue;
1987 1.1 skrll
1988 1.1 skrll for (s = ibfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
1989 1.1 skrll {
1990 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
1991 1.1 skrll
1992 1.1 skrll for (p = elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; p != NULL; p = p->next)
1993 1.1 skrll {
1994 1.1 skrll if (!bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec)
1995 1.1 skrll && bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec->output_section))
1996 1.1 skrll {
1997 1.1 skrll /* Input section has been discarded, either because
1998 1.1 skrll it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
1999 1.1 skrll linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
2000 1.1 skrll the relocs too. */
2001 1.1 skrll }
2002 1.1 skrll else if (p->count != 0)
2003 1.1 skrll {
2004 1.1 skrll srela = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
2005 1.1 skrll srela->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
2006 1.1 skrll if ((p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
2007 1.1 skrll info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
2008 1.1 skrll }
2009 1.1 skrll }
2010 1.1 skrll }
2011 1.1 skrll
2012 1.1 skrll local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
2013 1.1 skrll if (!local_got)
2014 1.1 skrll continue;
2015 1.1 skrll
2016 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
2017 1.1 skrll locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
2018 1.1 skrll end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
2019 1.1 skrll local_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
2020 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.sgot;
2021 1.1.1.3 christos srela = htab->elf.srelgot;
2022 1.1 skrll for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got, ++local_tls_type)
2023 1.1 skrll {
2024 1.1 skrll if (*local_got > 0)
2025 1.1 skrll {
2026 1.1 skrll *local_got = s->size;
2027 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2028 1.1 skrll if (*local_tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
2029 1.1 skrll s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2030 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info))
2031 1.1 skrll srela->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
2032 1.1 skrll }
2033 1.1 skrll else
2034 1.1 skrll *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
2035 1.1 skrll }
2036 1.1.1.3 christos
2037 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
2038 1.1.1.3 christos for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
2039 1.1.1.3 christos {
2040 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt[i].plt.refcount > 0)
2041 1.1.1.3 christos {
2042 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset = htab->elf.iplt->size;
2043 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.iplt->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2044 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.igotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2045 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.irelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
2046 1.1.1.3 christos }
2047 1.1.1.3 christos else
2048 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
2049 1.1.1.3 christos }
2050 1.1 skrll }
2051 1.1 skrll
2052 1.1 skrll if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
2053 1.1 skrll {
2054 1.1 skrll /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for R_390_TLS_LDM64
2055 1.1 skrll relocs. */
2056 1.1.1.3 christos htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
2057 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2058 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
2059 1.1 skrll }
2060 1.1 skrll else
2061 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
2062 1.1 skrll
2063 1.1 skrll /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
2064 1.1 skrll sym dynamic relocs. */
2065 1.1.1.3 christos elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
2066 1.1 skrll
2067 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_eh_frame_present (info))
2068 1.1.1.11 christos {
2069 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL
2070 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL
2071 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0
2072 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_section (htab->elf.splt->output_section))
2073 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->size = sizeof (elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt);
2074 1.1.1.11 christos }
2075 1.1.1.11 christos
2076 1.1.1.11 christos /* No need to size the .sframe section explicitly because the write-out
2077 1.1.1.11 christos mechanism is different. Simply prep up the FDE/FRE for the
2078 1.1.1.11 christos .plt section. */
2079 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_sframe_present (info))
2080 1.1.1.11 christos {
2081 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL
2082 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL
2083 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0
2084 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_section (htab->elf.splt->output_section))
2085 1.1.1.11 christos {
2086 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_create_sframe_plt (info);
2087 1.1.1.11 christos /* FIXME - Dirty Hack. Set the size to something non-zero for now,
2088 1.1.1.11 christos so that the section does not get stripped out below. The precise
2089 1.1.1.11 christos size of this section is known only when the contents are
2090 1.1.1.11 christos serialized in _bfd_s390x_elf_write_sframe_plt. */
2091 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->size = sizeof (sframe_header) + 1;
2092 1.1.1.11 christos }
2093 1.1.1.11 christos }
2094 1.1.1.11 christos
2095 1.1 skrll /* We now have determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.
2096 1.1 skrll Allocate memory for them. */
2097 1.1.1.9 christos relocs = false;
2098 1.1 skrll for (s = dynobj->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
2099 1.1 skrll {
2100 1.1 skrll if ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
2101 1.1 skrll continue;
2102 1.1 skrll
2103 1.1.1.3 christos if (s == htab->elf.splt
2104 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.sgot
2105 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.sgotplt
2106 1.1.1.11 christos || s == htab->plt_eh_frame
2107 1.1.1.11 christos || s == htab->plt_sframe
2108 1.1.1.6 christos || s == htab->elf.sdynbss
2109 1.1.1.6 christos || s == htab->elf.sdynrelro
2110 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.iplt
2111 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->elf.igotplt
2112 1.1.1.3 christos || s == htab->irelifunc)
2113 1.1 skrll {
2114 1.1 skrll /* Strip this section if we don't need it; see the
2115 1.1 skrll comment below. */
2116 1.1 skrll }
2117 1.1.1.9 christos else if (startswith (bfd_section_name (s), ".rela"))
2118 1.1 skrll {
2119 1.1.1.3 christos if (s->size != 0 && s != htab->elf.srelplt)
2120 1.1.1.9 christos {
2121 1.1.1.9 christos relocs = true;
2122 1.1.1.9 christos if (s == htab->elf.irelplt)
2123 1.1.1.9 christos {
2124 1.1.1.9 christos /* In static-pie case, there are IRELATIVE-relocs in
2125 1.1.1.9 christos .rela.iplt (htab->irelplt), which will later be grouped
2126 1.1.1.9 christos to .rela.plt. On s390, the IRELATIVE relocations are
2127 1.1.1.9 christos always located in .rela.iplt - even for non-static case.
2128 1.1.1.9 christos Ensure that DT_JMPREL, DT_PLTRELA, DT_PLTRELASZ is added
2129 1.1.1.9 christos to the dynamic section even if htab->srelplt->size == 0.
2130 1.1.1.9 christos See _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags in bfd/elflink.c. */
2131 1.1.1.9 christos htab->elf.dt_jmprel_required = true;
2132 1.1.1.9 christos }
2133 1.1.1.9 christos }
2134 1.1 skrll
2135 1.1 skrll /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
2136 1.1 skrll to copy relocs into the output file. */
2137 1.1 skrll s->reloc_count = 0;
2138 1.1 skrll }
2139 1.1 skrll else
2140 1.1 skrll {
2141 1.1 skrll /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space. */
2142 1.1 skrll continue;
2143 1.1 skrll }
2144 1.1 skrll
2145 1.1 skrll if (s->size == 0)
2146 1.1 skrll {
2147 1.1 skrll /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
2148 1.1 skrll output file. This is to handle .rela.bss and
2149 1.1 skrll .rela.plt. We must create it in
2150 1.1 skrll create_dynamic_sections, because it must be created
2151 1.1 skrll before the linker maps input sections to output
2152 1.1 skrll sections. The linker does that before
2153 1.1 skrll adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
2154 1.1 skrll function which decides whether anything needs to go
2155 1.1 skrll into these sections. */
2156 1.1 skrll
2157 1.1 skrll s->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
2158 1.1 skrll continue;
2159 1.1 skrll }
2160 1.1 skrll
2161 1.1 skrll if ((s->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
2162 1.1 skrll continue;
2163 1.1 skrll
2164 1.1.1.11 christos /* Skip allocating contents for .sframe section as it is written
2165 1.1.1.11 christos out differently. See below. */
2166 1.1.1.11 christos if (s == htab->plt_sframe)
2167 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2168 1.1.1.11 christos
2169 1.1 skrll /* Allocate memory for the section contents. We use bfd_zalloc
2170 1.1 skrll here in case unused entries are not reclaimed before the
2171 1.1 skrll section's contents are written out. This should not happen,
2172 1.1 skrll but this way if it does, we get a R_390_NONE reloc instead
2173 1.1 skrll of garbage. */
2174 1.1 skrll s->contents = (bfd_byte *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, s->size);
2175 1.1 skrll if (s->contents == NULL)
2176 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2177 1.1.1.11 christos s->alloced = 1;
2178 1.1.1.11 christos }
2179 1.1.1.11 christos
2180 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL
2181 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->contents != NULL)
2182 1.1.1.11 christos {
2183 1.1.1.11 christos memcpy (htab->plt_eh_frame->contents,
2184 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt,
2185 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->size);
2186 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (dynobj, htab->elf.splt->size,
2187 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->contents + PLT_FDE_LEN_OFFSET);
2188 1.1.1.11 christos }
2189 1.1.1.11 christos
2190 1.1.1.11 christos if (_bfd_elf_sframe_present (info))
2191 1.1.1.11 christos {
2192 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL
2193 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt != NULL
2194 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0
2195 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->contents == NULL)
2196 1.1.1.11 christos _bfd_s390_elf_write_sframe_plt (info);
2197 1.1 skrll }
2198 1.1 skrll
2199 1.1.1.9 christos return _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags (output_bfd, info, relocs);
2200 1.1 skrll }
2201 1.1 skrll
2202 1.1 skrll /* Return the base VMA address which should be subtracted from real addresses
2203 1.1 skrll when resolving @dtpoff relocation.
2204 1.1 skrll This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr. */
2205 1.1 skrll
2206 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma
2207 1.1.1.3 christos dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
2208 1.1 skrll {
2209 1.1 skrll /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already. */
2210 1.1 skrll if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
2211 1.1 skrll return 0;
2212 1.1 skrll return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
2213 1.1 skrll }
2214 1.1 skrll
2215 1.1 skrll /* Return the relocation value for @tpoff relocation
2216 1.1 skrll if STT_TLS virtual address is ADDRESS. */
2217 1.1 skrll
2218 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma
2219 1.1.1.3 christos tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
2220 1.1 skrll {
2221 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
2222 1.1 skrll
2223 1.1 skrll /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already. */
2224 1.1 skrll if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
2225 1.1 skrll return 0;
2226 1.1 skrll return htab->tls_size + htab->tls_sec->vma - address;
2227 1.1 skrll }
2228 1.1 skrll
2229 1.1 skrll /* Complain if TLS instruction relocation is against an invalid
2230 1.1 skrll instruction. */
2231 1.1 skrll
2232 1.1 skrll static void
2233 1.1.1.3 christos invalid_tls_insn (bfd *input_bfd,
2234 1.1.1.3 christos asection *input_section,
2235 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *rel)
2236 1.1 skrll {
2237 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto;
2238 1.1 skrll
2239 1.1 skrll howto = elf_howto_table + ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
2240 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler
2241 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
2242 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): invalid instruction for TLS relocation %s"),
2243 1.1 skrll input_bfd,
2244 1.1 skrll input_section,
2245 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
2246 1.1 skrll howto->name);
2247 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
2248 1.1 skrll }
2249 1.1 skrll
2250 1.1 skrll /* Relocate a 390 ELF section. */
2251 1.1 skrll
2252 1.1.1.9 christos static int
2253 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
2254 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info,
2255 1.1.1.2 christos bfd *input_bfd,
2256 1.1.1.2 christos asection *input_section,
2257 1.1.1.2 christos bfd_byte *contents,
2258 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
2259 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
2260 1.1.1.2 christos asection **local_sections)
2261 1.1 skrll {
2262 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
2263 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
2264 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
2265 1.1 skrll bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
2266 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
2267 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
2268 1.1 skrll
2269 1.1.1.8 christos if (!is_s390_elf (input_bfd))
2270 1.1.1.8 christos {
2271 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_wrong_format);
2272 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2273 1.1.1.8 christos }
2274 1.1 skrll
2275 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
2276 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
2277 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2278 1.1.1.2 christos
2279 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (input_bfd);
2280 1.1 skrll sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
2281 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
2282 1.1 skrll
2283 1.1 skrll rel = relocs;
2284 1.1 skrll relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
2285 1.1 skrll for (; rel < relend; rel++)
2286 1.1 skrll {
2287 1.1 skrll unsigned int r_type;
2288 1.1 skrll reloc_howto_type *howto;
2289 1.1 skrll unsigned long r_symndx;
2290 1.1 skrll struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
2291 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
2292 1.1 skrll asection *sec;
2293 1.1 skrll bfd_vma off;
2294 1.1 skrll bfd_vma relocation;
2295 1.1.1.9 christos bool unresolved_reloc;
2296 1.1 skrll bfd_reloc_status_type r;
2297 1.1 skrll int tls_type;
2298 1.1.1.9 christos bool resolved_to_zero;
2299 1.1 skrll
2300 1.1 skrll r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
2301 1.1 skrll if (r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT
2302 1.1 skrll || r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTENTRY)
2303 1.1 skrll continue;
2304 1.1 skrll if (r_type >= (int) R_390_max)
2305 1.1 skrll {
2306 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
2307 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2308 1.1 skrll }
2309 1.1 skrll
2310 1.1 skrll howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
2311 1.1 skrll r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
2312 1.1 skrll
2313 1.1 skrll h = NULL;
2314 1.1 skrll sym = NULL;
2315 1.1 skrll sec = NULL;
2316 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2317 1.1 skrll if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
2318 1.1 skrll {
2319 1.1 skrll sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
2320 1.1 skrll sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
2321 1.1.1.3 christos
2322 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
2323 1.1.1.3 christos {
2324 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (input_bfd);
2325 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt == NULL)
2326 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2327 1.1.1.3 christos
2328 1.1.1.3 christos /* Address of the PLT slot. */
2329 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2330 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2331 1.1.1.3 christos + local_plt[r_symndx].plt.offset);
2332 1.1.1.3 christos
2333 1.1.1.3 christos switch (r_type)
2334 1.1.1.3 christos {
2335 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF16:
2336 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF32:
2337 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLTOFF64:
2338 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
2339 1.1.1.4 christos break;
2340 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT12:
2341 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT16:
2342 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT20:
2343 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT32:
2344 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLT64:
2345 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
2346 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT12:
2347 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT16:
2348 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT20:
2349 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT32:
2350 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOT64:
2351 1.1.1.3 christos case R_390_GOTENT:
2352 1.1.1.3 christos {
2353 1.1.1.3 christos /* Write the PLT slot address into the GOT slot. */
2354 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
2355 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents +
2356 1.1.1.3 christos local_got_offsets[r_symndx]);
2357 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (local_got_offsets[r_symndx] +
2358 1.1.1.8 christos s390_got_offset (info));
2359 1.1.1.3 christos
2360 1.1.1.3 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
2361 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
2362 1.1.1.3 christos break;
2363 1.1.1.3 christos }
2364 1.1.1.3 christos default:
2365 1.1.1.3 christos break;
2366 1.1.1.3 christos }
2367 1.1.1.3 christos /* The output section is needed later in
2368 1.1.1.3 christos finish_dynamic_section when creating the dynamic
2369 1.1.1.3 christos relocation. */
2370 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[r_symndx].sec = sec;
2371 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_relocation;
2372 1.1.1.3 christos }
2373 1.1.1.3 christos else
2374 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sec, rel);
2375 1.1 skrll }
2376 1.1 skrll else
2377 1.1 skrll {
2378 1.1.1.9 christos bool warned ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2379 1.1.1.9 christos bool ignored ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2380 1.1 skrll
2381 1.1 skrll RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rel,
2382 1.1 skrll r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
2383 1.1 skrll h, sec, relocation,
2384 1.1.1.4 christos unresolved_reloc, warned, ignored);
2385 1.1 skrll }
2386 1.1 skrll
2387 1.1.1.3 christos if (sec != NULL && discarded_section (sec))
2388 1.1.1.2 christos RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
2389 1.1.1.3 christos rel, 1, relend, howto, 0, contents);
2390 1.1 skrll
2391 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
2392 1.1 skrll continue;
2393 1.1 skrll
2394 1.1.1.6 christos resolved_to_zero = (h != NULL
2395 1.1.1.6 christos && UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h));
2396 1.1.1.6 christos
2397 1.1 skrll switch (r_type)
2398 1.1 skrll {
2399 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT12:
2400 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT16:
2401 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT20:
2402 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT32:
2403 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLT64:
2404 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
2405 1.1 skrll /* There are three cases for a GOTPLT relocation. 1) The
2406 1.1 skrll relocation is against the jump slot entry of a plt that
2407 1.1 skrll will get emitted to the output file. 2) The relocation
2408 1.1 skrll is against the jump slot of a plt entry that has been
2409 1.1 skrll removed. elf_s390_adjust_gotplt has created a GOT entry
2410 1.1 skrll as replacement. 3) The relocation is against a local symbol.
2411 1.1 skrll Cases 2) and 3) are the same as the GOT relocation code
2412 1.1 skrll so we just have to test for case 1 and fall through for
2413 1.1 skrll the other two. */
2414 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL && h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
2415 1.1 skrll {
2416 1.1 skrll bfd_vma plt_index;
2417 1.1 skrll
2418 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
2419 1.1.1.3 christos {
2420 1.1.1.8 christos /* Entry indices of .iplt and .igot.plt match
2421 1.1.1.8 christos 1:1. No magic PLT first entry here. */
2422 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
2423 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE
2424 1.1.1.8 christos + s390_gotplt_offset (info)
2425 1.1.1.8 christos + htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset);
2426 1.1.1.3 christos }
2427 1.1.1.3 christos else
2428 1.1.1.3 christos {
2429 1.1.1.8 christos plt_index = ((h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE)
2430 1.1.1.8 christos / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
2431 1.1.1.8 christos
2432 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE
2433 1.1.1.8 christos + s390_gotplt_offset (info));
2434 1.1.1.3 christos }
2435 1.1.1.8 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
2436 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
2437 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2438 1.1 skrll break;
2439 1.1 skrll }
2440 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */
2441 1.1 skrll
2442 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT12:
2443 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT16:
2444 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT20:
2445 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT32:
2446 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOT64:
2447 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTENT:
2448 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the global
2449 1.1 skrll offset table. */
2450 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
2451 1.1 skrll abort ();
2452 1.1 skrll
2453 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
2454 1.1 skrll {
2455 1.1.1.9 christos bool dyn;
2456 1.1 skrll
2457 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset;
2458 1.1 skrll dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
2459 1.1.1.3 christos
2460 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
2461 1.1.1.3 christos {
2462 1.1.1.3 christos BFD_ASSERT (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1);
2463 1.1.1.3 christos if (off == (bfd_vma)-1)
2464 1.1.1.3 christos {
2465 1.1.1.3 christos /* No explicit GOT usage so redirect to the
2466 1.1.1.3 christos got.iplt slot. */
2467 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = (s390_gotplt_offset (info)
2468 1.1.1.8 christos + htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset
2469 1.1.1.8 christos + (h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE
2470 1.1.1.8 christos * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE));
2471 1.1.1.8 christos
2472 1.1.1.8 christos /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
2473 1.1.1.8 christos the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
2474 1.1.1.8 christos between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
2475 1.1.1.8 christos add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value. */
2476 1.1.1.8 christos if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
2477 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
2478 1.1.1.8 christos
2479 1.1.1.8 christos break;
2480 1.1.1.3 christos }
2481 1.1.1.3 christos else
2482 1.1.1.3 christos {
2483 1.1.1.3 christos /* Explicit GOT slots must contain the address
2484 1.1.1.3 christos of the PLT slot. This will be handled in
2485 1.1.1.3 christos finish_dynamic_symbol. */
2486 1.1.1.3 christos }
2487 1.1.1.3 christos }
2488 1.1.1.4 christos else if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
2489 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_link_pic (info),
2490 1.1.1.4 christos h)
2491 1.1.1.11 christos || SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h)
2492 1.1.1.6 christos || resolved_to_zero)
2493 1.1 skrll {
2494 1.1 skrll /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
2495 1.1 skrll -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
2496 1.1 skrll locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
2497 1.1 skrll because of a version file. We must initialize
2498 1.1 skrll this entry in the global offset table. Since the
2499 1.1 skrll offset must always be a multiple of 2, we use the
2500 1.1 skrll least significant bit to record whether we have
2501 1.1 skrll initialized it already.
2502 1.1 skrll
2503 1.1 skrll When doing a dynamic link, we create a .rel.got
2504 1.1 skrll relocation entry to initialize the value. This
2505 1.1 skrll is done in the finish_dynamic_symbol routine. */
2506 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0)
2507 1.1 skrll off &= ~1;
2508 1.1 skrll else
2509 1.1 skrll {
2510 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
2511 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
2512 1.1 skrll h->got.offset |= 1;
2513 1.1 skrll }
2514 1.1.1.4 christos
2515 1.1.1.8 christos /* When turning a GOT slot dereference into a direct
2516 1.1.1.8 christos reference using larl we have to make sure that
2517 1.1.1.8 christos the symbol is 1. properly aligned and 2. it is no
2518 1.1.1.8 christos ABS symbol or will become one. */
2519 1.1.1.11 christos if (h->def_regular
2520 1.1.1.11 christos && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h)
2521 1.1.1.4 christos /* lgrl rx,sym@GOTENT -> larl rx, sym */
2522 1.1.1.4 christos && ((r_type == R_390_GOTENT
2523 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_get_16 (input_bfd,
2524 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
2525 1.1.1.4 christos & 0xff0f) == 0xc408)
2526 1.1.1.4 christos /* lg rx, sym@GOT(r12) -> larl rx, sym */
2527 1.1.1.4 christos || (r_type == R_390_GOT20
2528 1.1.1.4 christos && (bfd_get_32 (input_bfd,
2529 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
2530 1.1.1.4 christos & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000
2531 1.1.1.4 christos && bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
2532 1.1.1.8 christos contents + rel->r_offset + 3) == 0x04))
2533 1.1.1.11 christos && !bfd_is_abs_symbol (&h->root)
2534 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hdynamic
2535 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hgot
2536 1.1.1.8 christos && h != htab->elf.hplt
2537 1.1.1.11 christos && !((h->root.u.def.value
2538 1.1.1.11 christos + sec->output_section->vma
2539 1.1.1.11 christos + sec->output_offset) & 1))
2540 1.1.1.4 christos {
2541 1.1.1.4 christos unsigned short new_insn =
2542 1.1.1.4 christos (0xc000 | (bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
2543 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 1) & 0xf0));
2544 1.1.1.4 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, new_insn,
2545 1.1.1.4 christos contents + rel->r_offset - 2);
2546 1.1.1.4 christos r_type = R_390_PC32DBL;
2547 1.1.1.4 christos rel->r_addend = 2;
2548 1.1.1.4 christos howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
2549 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = h->root.u.def.value
2550 1.1.1.4 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
2551 1.1.1.4 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset;
2552 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation;
2553 1.1.1.4 christos }
2554 1.1 skrll }
2555 1.1 skrll else
2556 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2557 1.1 skrll }
2558 1.1 skrll else
2559 1.1 skrll {
2560 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
2561 1.1 skrll abort ();
2562 1.1 skrll
2563 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
2564 1.1 skrll
2565 1.1 skrll /* The offset must always be a multiple of 8. We use
2566 1.1 skrll the least significant bit to record whether we have
2567 1.1 skrll already generated the necessary reloc. */
2568 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0)
2569 1.1 skrll off &= ~1;
2570 1.1 skrll else
2571 1.1 skrll {
2572 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
2573 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
2574 1.1 skrll
2575 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info))
2576 1.1 skrll {
2577 1.1 skrll asection *s;
2578 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
2579 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
2580 1.1 skrll
2581 1.1.1.3 christos s = htab->elf.srelgot;
2582 1.1 skrll if (s == NULL)
2583 1.1 skrll abort ();
2584 1.1 skrll
2585 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
2586 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
2587 1.1 skrll + off);
2588 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
2589 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation;
2590 1.1 skrll loc = s->contents;
2591 1.1 skrll loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
2592 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
2593 1.1 skrll }
2594 1.1 skrll
2595 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
2596 1.1 skrll }
2597 1.1 skrll }
2598 1.1 skrll
2599 1.1 skrll if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
2600 1.1 skrll abort ();
2601 1.1 skrll
2602 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = s390_got_offset (info) + off;
2603 1.1 skrll
2604 1.1 skrll /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
2605 1.1 skrll the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
2606 1.1 skrll between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
2607 1.1 skrll add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value. */
2608 1.1 skrll if ( r_type == R_390_GOTENT
2609 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
2610 1.1.1.8 christos relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
2611 1.1 skrll
2612 1.1 skrll break;
2613 1.1 skrll
2614 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF16:
2615 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF32:
2616 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTOFF64:
2617 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is relative to the start of the global offset
2618 1.1 skrll table. */
2619 1.1 skrll
2620 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL
2621 1.1.1.4 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
2622 1.1.1.4 christos && h->def_regular
2623 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_executable (info))
2624 1.1.1.4 christos {
2625 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2626 1.1.1.4 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2627 1.1.1.4 christos + h->plt.offset
2628 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info));
2629 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation;
2630 1.1.1.4 christos }
2631 1.1.1.4 christos
2632 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
2633 1.1 skrll break;
2634 1.1 skrll
2635 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPC:
2636 1.1 skrll case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
2637 1.1 skrll /* Use global offset table as symbol value. */
2638 1.1.1.8 christos relocation = s390_got_pointer (info);
2639 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2640 1.1 skrll break;
2641 1.1 skrll
2642 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT12DBL:
2643 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT16DBL:
2644 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PLT24DBL:
2645 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32:
2646 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT32DBL:
2647 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLT64:
2648 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
2649 1.1 skrll procedure linkage table. */
2650 1.1 skrll
2651 1.1 skrll /* Resolve a PLT32 reloc against a local symbol directly,
2652 1.1 skrll without using the procedure linkage table. */
2653 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL)
2654 1.1 skrll break;
2655 1.1 skrll
2656 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
2657 1.1.1.4 christos || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
2658 1.1 skrll {
2659 1.1 skrll /* We didn't make a PLT entry for this symbol. This
2660 1.1 skrll happens when statically linking PIC code, or when
2661 1.1 skrll using -Bsymbolic. */
2662 1.1.1.11 christos
2663 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace relative long addressing instructions of weak
2664 1.1.1.11 christos symbols, which will definitely resolve to zero, with
2665 1.1.1.11 christos either a load address of 0 or a trapping insn.
2666 1.1.1.11 christos This prevents the PLT32DBL relocation from overflowing in
2667 1.1.1.11 christos case the binary will be loaded at 4GB or more. */
2668 1.1.1.11 christos if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
2669 1.1.1.11 christos && !h->root.linker_def
2670 1.1.1.11 christos && (bfd_link_executable (info)
2671 1.1.1.11 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
2672 1.1.1.11 christos && r_type == R_390_PLT32DBL
2673 1.1.1.11 christos && rel->r_offset >= 2)
2674 1.1.1.11 christos {
2675 1.1.1.11 christos void *insn_start = contents + rel->r_offset - 2;
2676 1.1.1.11 christos uint16_t op = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, insn_start) & 0xff0f;
2677 1.1.1.11 christos uint8_t reg = bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, insn_start + 1) & 0xf0;
2678 1.1.1.11 christos
2679 1.1.1.11 christos /* NOTE: The order of the if's is important! */
2680 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace load address relative long (larl) with load
2681 1.1.1.11 christos address (lay) */
2682 1.1.1.11 christos if (op == 0xc000)
2683 1.1.1.11 christos {
2684 1.1.1.11 christos /* larl rX,<weak sym> -> lay rX,0(0) */
2685 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xe300 | reg, insn_start);
2686 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x71, insn_start + 2);
2687 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2688 1.1.1.11 christos }
2689 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace branch relative and save long (brasl) with a trap. */
2690 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc005)
2691 1.1.1.11 christos {
2692 1.1.1.11 christos /* brasl rX,<weak sym> -> jg .+2 (6-byte trap) */
2693 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc0f4, insn_start);
2694 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x1, insn_start + 2);
2695 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2696 1.1.1.11 christos }
2697 1.1.1.11 christos }
2698 1.1.1.11 christos
2699 1.1 skrll break;
2700 1.1 skrll }
2701 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
2702 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2703 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2704 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset);
2705 1.1.1.3 christos else
2706 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
2707 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
2708 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset);
2709 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2710 1.1 skrll break;
2711 1.1 skrll
2712 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF16:
2713 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF32:
2714 1.1 skrll case R_390_PLTOFF64:
2715 1.1 skrll /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
2716 1.1 skrll procedure linkage table relative to the start of the GOT. */
2717 1.1 skrll
2718 1.1 skrll /* For local symbols or if we didn't make a PLT entry for
2719 1.1 skrll this symbol resolve the symbol directly. */
2720 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == NULL
2721 1.1 skrll || h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
2722 1.1.1.4 christos || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
2723 1.1 skrll {
2724 1.1.1.8 christos relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
2725 1.1 skrll break;
2726 1.1 skrll }
2727 1.1 skrll
2728 1.1.1.3 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
2729 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2730 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2731 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset
2732 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info));
2733 1.1.1.3 christos else
2734 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
2735 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
2736 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset
2737 1.1.1.8 christos - s390_got_pointer (info));
2738 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
2739 1.1 skrll break;
2740 1.1 skrll
2741 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16:
2742 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC12DBL:
2743 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC16DBL:
2744 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_PC24DBL:
2745 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32:
2746 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC32DBL:
2747 1.1 skrll case R_390_PC64:
2748 1.1.1.6 christos if (h != NULL
2749 1.1.1.6 christos && bfd_link_pie (info)
2750 1.1.1.6 christos && !h->def_regular)
2751 1.1.1.6 christos {
2752 1.1.1.7 christos _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: `%s' non-PLT reloc for symbol defined "
2753 1.1.1.6 christos "in shared library and accessed "
2754 1.1.1.6 christos "from executable "
2755 1.1.1.6 christos "(rebuild file with -fPIC ?)"),
2756 1.1.1.6 christos input_bfd, h->root.root.string);
2757 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
2758 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2759 1.1.1.6 christos }
2760 1.1.1.4 christos /* The target of these relocs are instruction operands
2761 1.1.1.4 christos residing in read-only sections. We cannot emit a runtime
2762 1.1.1.4 christos reloc for it. */
2763 1.1.1.4 christos if (h != NULL
2764 1.1.1.4 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
2765 1.1.1.4 christos && h->def_regular
2766 1.1.1.4 christos && bfd_link_pic (info))
2767 1.1.1.4 christos {
2768 1.1.1.4 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2769 1.1.1.4 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2770 1.1.1.4 christos + h->plt.offset);
2771 1.1.1.4 christos goto do_relocation;
2772 1.1.1.4 christos }
2773 1.1.1.11 christos
2774 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace relative long addressing instructions of weak
2775 1.1.1.11 christos symbols, which will definitely resolve to zero, with
2776 1.1.1.11 christos either a load address of 0, a NOP, or a trapping insn.
2777 1.1.1.11 christos This prevents the PC32DBL relocation from overflowing in
2778 1.1.1.11 christos case the binary will be loaded at 4GB or more. */
2779 1.1.1.11 christos if (h != NULL
2780 1.1.1.11 christos && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
2781 1.1.1.11 christos && !h->root.linker_def
2782 1.1.1.11 christos && (bfd_link_executable (info)
2783 1.1.1.11 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
2784 1.1.1.11 christos && r_type == R_390_PC32DBL
2785 1.1.1.11 christos && rel->r_offset >= 2)
2786 1.1.1.11 christos {
2787 1.1.1.11 christos void *insn_start = contents + rel->r_offset - 2;
2788 1.1.1.11 christos uint16_t op = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, insn_start) & 0xff0f;
2789 1.1.1.11 christos uint8_t reg = bfd_get_8 (input_bfd, insn_start + 1) & 0xf0;
2790 1.1.1.11 christos
2791 1.1.1.11 christos /* NOTE: The order of the if's is important! */
2792 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace load address relative long (larl) with load
2793 1.1.1.11 christos address (lay) */
2794 1.1.1.11 christos if (op == 0xc000)
2795 1.1.1.11 christos {
2796 1.1.1.11 christos /* larl rX,<weak sym> -> lay rX,0(0) */
2797 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xe300 | reg, insn_start);
2798 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x71, insn_start + 2);
2799 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2800 1.1.1.11 christos }
2801 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace prefetch data relative long (pfdrl) with a NOP */
2802 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc602)
2803 1.1.1.11 christos {
2804 1.1.1.11 christos /* Emit a 6-byte NOP: jgnop . */
2805 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc004, insn_start);
2806 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x0, insn_start + 2);
2807 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2808 1.1.1.11 christos }
2809 1.1.1.11 christos /* Replace the following instructions with a trap:
2810 1.1.1.11 christos - branch relative and save long (brasl)
2811 1.1.1.11 christos - load (logical) relative long (lrl, lgrl, lgfrl, llgfrl)
2812 1.1.1.11 christos - load (logical) halfword relative long (lhrl, lghrl, llhrl, llghrl)
2813 1.1.1.11 christos - store relative long (strl, stgrl)
2814 1.1.1.11 christos - store halfword relative long (sthrl)
2815 1.1.1.11 christos - execute relative long (exrl)
2816 1.1.1.11 christos - compare (logical) relative long (crl, clrl, cgrl, clgrl, cgfrl, clgfrl)
2817 1.1.1.11 christos - compare (logical) halfword relative long (chrl, cghrl, clhrl, clghrl) */
2818 1.1.1.11 christos else if (op == 0xc005 || (op & 0xff00) == 0xc400
2819 1.1.1.11 christos || (op & 0xff00) == 0xc600)
2820 1.1.1.11 christos {
2821 1.1.1.11 christos /* Emit a 6-byte trap: jg .+2 */
2822 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, 0xc0f4, insn_start);
2823 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0x1, insn_start + 2);
2824 1.1.1.11 christos continue;
2825 1.1.1.11 christos }
2826 1.1.1.11 christos }
2827 1.1.1.6 christos /* Fall through. */
2828 1.1.1.4 christos
2829 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_8:
2830 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_16:
2831 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_32:
2832 1.1.1.4 christos case R_390_64:
2833 1.1.1.3 christos
2834 1.1.1.7 christos if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
2835 1.1.1.7 christos break;
2836 1.1.1.7 christos
2837 1.1.1.3 christos if (h != NULL
2838 1.1.1.3 christos && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
2839 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_regular)
2840 1.1.1.3 christos {
2841 1.1.1.6 christos if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
2842 1.1.1.3 christos {
2843 1.1.1.6 christos /* For a non-shared object the symbol will not
2844 1.1.1.6 christos change. Hence we can write the address of the
2845 1.1.1.6 christos target IPLT slot now. */
2846 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
2847 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
2848 1.1.1.3 christos + h ->plt.offset);
2849 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_relocation;
2850 1.1.1.3 christos }
2851 1.1.1.3 christos else
2852 1.1.1.3 christos {
2853 1.1.1.3 christos /* For shared objects a runtime relocation is needed. */
2854 1.1.1.3 christos
2855 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
2856 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sreloc;
2857 1.1.1.3 christos
2858 1.1.1.3 christos /* Need a dynamic relocation to get the real function
2859 1.1.1.3 christos address. */
2860 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd,
2861 1.1.1.3 christos info,
2862 1.1.1.3 christos input_section,
2863 1.1.1.3 christos rel->r_offset);
2864 1.1.1.3 christos if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
2865 1.1.1.3 christos || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
2866 1.1.1.3 christos abort ();
2867 1.1.1.3 christos
2868 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
2869 1.1.1.3 christos + input_section->output_offset);
2870 1.1.1.3 christos
2871 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->dynindx == -1
2872 1.1.1.3 christos || h->forced_local
2873 1.1.1.4 christos || bfd_link_executable (info))
2874 1.1.1.3 christos {
2875 1.1.1.3 christos /* This symbol is resolved locally. */
2876 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
2877 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
2878 1.1.1.3 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
2879 1.1.1.3 christos + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
2880 1.1.1.3 christos }
2881 1.1.1.3 christos else
2882 1.1.1.3 christos {
2883 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
2884 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_addend = 0;
2885 1.1.1.3 christos }
2886 1.1.1.3 christos
2887 1.1.1.3 christos sreloc = htab->elf.irelifunc;
2888 1.1.1.3 christos elf_append_rela (output_bfd, sreloc, &outrel);
2889 1.1.1.3 christos
2890 1.1.1.3 christos /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we
2891 1.1.1.3 christos do not want to fiddle with the addend. Otherwise,
2892 1.1.1.3 christos we need to include the symbol value so that it
2893 1.1.1.3 christos becomes an addend for the dynamic reloc. For an
2894 1.1.1.3 christos internal symbol, we have updated addend. */
2895 1.1.1.3 christos continue;
2896 1.1.1.3 christos }
2897 1.1.1.3 christos }
2898 1.1.1.3 christos
2899 1.1.1.4 christos if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
2900 1.1 skrll && (h == NULL
2901 1.1.1.6 christos || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT
2902 1.1.1.6 christos && !resolved_to_zero)
2903 1.1 skrll || h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
2904 1.1 skrll && ((r_type != R_390_PC16
2905 1.1.1.4 christos && r_type != R_390_PC12DBL
2906 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC16DBL
2907 1.1.1.4 christos && r_type != R_390_PC24DBL
2908 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC32
2909 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC32DBL
2910 1.1 skrll && r_type != R_390_PC64)
2911 1.1.1.2 christos || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)))
2912 1.1 skrll || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
2913 1.1.1.4 christos && !bfd_link_pic (info)
2914 1.1 skrll && h != NULL
2915 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx != -1
2916 1.1 skrll && !h->non_got_ref
2917 1.1 skrll && ((h->def_dynamic
2918 1.1 skrll && !h->def_regular)
2919 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
2920 1.1 skrll || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
2921 1.1 skrll {
2922 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
2923 1.1.1.9 christos bool skip, relocate;
2924 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc;
2925 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
2926 1.1 skrll
2927 1.1 skrll /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
2928 1.1 skrll are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
2929 1.1 skrll time. */
2930 1.1.1.9 christos skip = false;
2931 1.1.1.9 christos relocate = false;
2932 1.1 skrll
2933 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset =
2934 1.1 skrll _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
2935 1.1 skrll rel->r_offset);
2936 1.1 skrll if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1)
2937 1.1.1.9 christos skip = true;
2938 1.1 skrll else if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
2939 1.1.1.9 christos skip = true, relocate = true;
2940 1.1 skrll
2941 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
2942 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset);
2943 1.1 skrll
2944 1.1 skrll if (skip)
2945 1.1 skrll memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof outrel);
2946 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL
2947 1.1 skrll && h->dynindx != -1
2948 1.1 skrll && (r_type == R_390_PC16
2949 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PC12DBL
2950 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC16DBL
2951 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
2952 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC32
2953 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC32DBL
2954 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_PC64
2955 1.1.1.4 christos || !bfd_link_pic (info)
2956 1.1.1.2 christos || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
2957 1.1 skrll || !h->def_regular))
2958 1.1 skrll {
2959 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
2960 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = rel->r_addend;
2961 1.1 skrll }
2962 1.1 skrll else
2963 1.1 skrll {
2964 1.1 skrll /* This symbol is local, or marked to become local. */
2965 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation + rel->r_addend;
2966 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_64)
2967 1.1 skrll {
2968 1.1.1.9 christos relocate = true;
2969 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
2970 1.1 skrll }
2971 1.1 skrll else
2972 1.1 skrll {
2973 1.1 skrll long sindx;
2974 1.1 skrll
2975 1.1 skrll if (bfd_is_abs_section (sec))
2976 1.1 skrll sindx = 0;
2977 1.1 skrll else if (sec == NULL || sec->owner == NULL)
2978 1.1 skrll {
2979 1.1 skrll bfd_set_error(bfd_error_bad_value);
2980 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
2981 1.1 skrll }
2982 1.1 skrll else
2983 1.1 skrll {
2984 1.1 skrll asection *osec;
2985 1.1 skrll
2986 1.1 skrll osec = sec->output_section;
2987 1.1 skrll sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
2988 1.1 skrll
2989 1.1 skrll if (sindx == 0)
2990 1.1 skrll {
2991 1.1 skrll osec = htab->elf.text_index_section;
2992 1.1 skrll sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
2993 1.1 skrll }
2994 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (sindx != 0);
2995 1.1 skrll
2996 1.1 skrll /* We are turning this relocation into one
2997 1.1 skrll against a section symbol, so subtract out
2998 1.1 skrll the output section's address but not the
2999 1.1 skrll offset of the input section in the output
3000 1.1 skrll section. */
3001 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
3002 1.1 skrll }
3003 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (sindx, r_type);
3004 1.1 skrll }
3005 1.1 skrll }
3006 1.1 skrll
3007 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
3008 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL)
3009 1.1 skrll abort ();
3010 1.1 skrll
3011 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents;
3012 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3013 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3014 1.1 skrll
3015 1.1 skrll /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we do
3016 1.1 skrll not want to fiddle with the addend. Otherwise, we
3017 1.1 skrll need to include the symbol value so that it becomes
3018 1.1 skrll an addend for the dynamic reloc. */
3019 1.1 skrll if (! relocate)
3020 1.1 skrll continue;
3021 1.1 skrll }
3022 1.1 skrll
3023 1.1 skrll break;
3024 1.1 skrll
3025 1.1 skrll /* Relocations for tls literal pool entries. */
3026 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IE64:
3027 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info))
3028 1.1 skrll {
3029 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
3030 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc;
3031 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3032 1.1 skrll
3033 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
3034 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_section->vma
3035 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset;
3036 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
3037 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
3038 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL)
3039 1.1 skrll abort ();
3040 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents;
3041 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3042 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3043 1.1 skrll }
3044 1.1 skrll /* Fall through. */
3045 1.1 skrll
3046 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GD64:
3047 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
3048 1.1 skrll r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h == NULL);
3049 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
3050 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
3051 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
3052 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL)
3053 1.1 skrll {
3054 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
3055 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && h->dynindx == -1 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
3056 1.1 skrll r_type = R_390_TLS_LE64;
3057 1.1 skrll }
3058 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
3059 1.1 skrll r_type = R_390_TLS_IE64;
3060 1.1 skrll
3061 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64)
3062 1.1 skrll {
3063 1.1 skrll /* This relocation gets optimized away by the local exec
3064 1.1 skrll access optimization. */
3065 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
3066 1.1.1.10 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation) + rel->r_addend,
3067 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset);
3068 1.1 skrll continue;
3069 1.1 skrll }
3070 1.1 skrll
3071 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
3072 1.1 skrll abort ();
3073 1.1 skrll
3074 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
3075 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset;
3076 1.1 skrll else
3077 1.1 skrll {
3078 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
3079 1.1 skrll abort ();
3080 1.1 skrll
3081 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
3082 1.1 skrll }
3083 1.1 skrll
3084 1.1 skrll emit_tls_relocs:
3085 1.1 skrll
3086 1.1 skrll if ((off & 1) != 0)
3087 1.1 skrll off &= ~1;
3088 1.1 skrll else
3089 1.1 skrll {
3090 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
3091 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3092 1.1 skrll int dr_type, indx;
3093 1.1 skrll
3094 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
3095 1.1 skrll abort ();
3096 1.1 skrll
3097 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
3098 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
3099 1.1 skrll
3100 1.1 skrll indx = h && h->dynindx != -1 ? h->dynindx : 0;
3101 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
3102 1.1 skrll dr_type = R_390_TLS_DTPMOD;
3103 1.1 skrll else
3104 1.1 skrll dr_type = R_390_TLS_TPOFF;
3105 1.1 skrll if (dr_type == R_390_TLS_TPOFF && indx == 0)
3106 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
3107 1.1 skrll else
3108 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0;
3109 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, dr_type);
3110 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
3111 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
3112 1.1 skrll * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3113 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3114 1.1 skrll
3115 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
3116 1.1 skrll {
3117 1.1 skrll if (indx == 0)
3118 1.1 skrll {
3119 1.1.1.6 christos BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
3120 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
3121 1.1 skrll relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
3122 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
3123 1.1 skrll }
3124 1.1 skrll else
3125 1.1 skrll {
3126 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_DTPOFF);
3127 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3128 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0;
3129 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++;
3130 1.1 skrll loc += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3131 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3132 1.1 skrll }
3133 1.1 skrll }
3134 1.1 skrll
3135 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
3136 1.1 skrll h->got.offset |= 1;
3137 1.1 skrll else
3138 1.1 skrll local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
3139 1.1 skrll }
3140 1.1 skrll
3141 1.1 skrll if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
3142 1.1 skrll abort ();
3143 1.1 skrll if (r_type == ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
3144 1.1 skrll {
3145 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
3146 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IE64 || r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
3147 1.1.1.3 christos relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
3148 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
3149 1.1 skrll }
3150 1.1 skrll else
3151 1.1 skrll {
3152 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off,
3153 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset);
3154 1.1 skrll continue;
3155 1.1 skrll }
3156 1.1 skrll break;
3157 1.1 skrll
3158 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
3159 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
3160 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
3161 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL)
3162 1.1 skrll {
3163 1.1 skrll if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
3164 1.1 skrll abort();
3165 1.1 skrll off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
3166 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info))
3167 1.1 skrll goto emit_tls_relocs;
3168 1.1 skrll }
3169 1.1 skrll else
3170 1.1 skrll {
3171 1.1 skrll off = h->got.offset;
3172 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
3173 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info) || h->dynindx != -1 || tls_type < GOT_TLS_IE)
3174 1.1 skrll goto emit_tls_relocs;
3175 1.1 skrll }
3176 1.1 skrll
3177 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
3178 1.1 skrll abort ();
3179 1.1 skrll
3180 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
3181 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
3182 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
3183 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
3184 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
3185 1.1.1.3 christos relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
3186 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
3187 1.1 skrll break;
3188 1.1 skrll
3189 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
3190 1.1.1.9 christos if (! bfd_link_dll (info))
3191 1.1 skrll /* The literal pool entry this relocation refers to gets ignored
3192 1.1 skrll by the optimized code of the local exec model. Do nothing
3193 1.1 skrll and the value will turn out zero. */
3194 1.1 skrll continue;
3195 1.1 skrll
3196 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
3197 1.1 skrll abort ();
3198 1.1 skrll
3199 1.1 skrll off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
3200 1.1 skrll if (off & 1)
3201 1.1 skrll off &= ~1;
3202 1.1 skrll else
3203 1.1 skrll {
3204 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
3205 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3206 1.1 skrll
3207 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
3208 1.1 skrll abort ();
3209 1.1 skrll
3210 1.1.1.3 christos outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
3211 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
3212 1.1 skrll
3213 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 0,
3214 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
3215 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_TLS_DTPMOD);
3216 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0;
3217 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
3218 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
3219 1.1 skrll * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3220 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3221 1.1 skrll htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
3222 1.1 skrll }
3223 1.1.1.3 christos relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
3224 1.1.1.9 christos unresolved_reloc = false;
3225 1.1 skrll break;
3226 1.1 skrll
3227 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LE64:
3228 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info))
3229 1.1 skrll {
3230 1.1 skrll /* Linking a shared library with non-fpic code requires
3231 1.1 skrll a R_390_TLS_TPOFF relocation. */
3232 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
3233 1.1 skrll asection *sreloc;
3234 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3235 1.1 skrll int indx;
3236 1.1 skrll
3237 1.1 skrll outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
3238 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_section->vma
3239 1.1 skrll + input_section->output_offset;
3240 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL && h->dynindx != -1)
3241 1.1 skrll indx = h->dynindx;
3242 1.1 skrll else
3243 1.1 skrll indx = 0;
3244 1.1 skrll outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_TPOFF);
3245 1.1 skrll if (indx == 0)
3246 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
3247 1.1 skrll else
3248 1.1 skrll outrel.r_addend = 0;
3249 1.1 skrll sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
3250 1.1 skrll if (sreloc == NULL)
3251 1.1 skrll abort ();
3252 1.1 skrll loc = sreloc->contents;
3253 1.1 skrll loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3254 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
3255 1.1 skrll }
3256 1.1 skrll else
3257 1.1 skrll {
3258 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
3259 1.1.1.10 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation) + rel->r_addend,
3260 1.1 skrll contents + rel->r_offset);
3261 1.1 skrll }
3262 1.1 skrll continue;
3263 1.1 skrll
3264 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDO64:
3265 1.1.1.9 christos if (bfd_link_dll (info) || (input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING))
3266 1.1 skrll relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
3267 1.1 skrll else
3268 1.1 skrll /* When converting LDO to LE, we must negate. */
3269 1.1 skrll relocation = -tpoff (info, relocation);
3270 1.1 skrll break;
3271 1.1 skrll
3272 1.1 skrll /* Relocations for tls instructions. */
3273 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LOAD:
3274 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_GDCALL:
3275 1.1 skrll case R_390_TLS_LDCALL:
3276 1.1 skrll tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
3277 1.1 skrll if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
3278 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
3279 1.1 skrll else if (h != NULL)
3280 1.1 skrll tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
3281 1.1 skrll
3282 1.1 skrll if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
3283 1.1 skrll continue;
3284 1.1 skrll
3285 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LOAD)
3286 1.1 skrll {
3287 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
3288 1.1 skrll {
3289 1.1 skrll /* IE->LE transition. Four valid cases:
3290 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
3291 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
3292 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
3293 1.1 skrll lg %rx,(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */
3294 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1, ry;
3295 1.1 skrll
3296 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
3297 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3298 1.1 skrll if (insn1 != 0x0004)
3299 1.1.1.6 christos {
3300 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
3301 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3302 1.1.1.6 christos }
3303 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe3000000)
3304 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */
3305 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
3306 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe3000000)
3307 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */
3308 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
3309 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000)
3310 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */
3311 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
3312 1.1 skrll else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe30c0000)
3313 1.1 skrll /* lg %rx,0(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0 */
3314 1.1 skrll ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
3315 1.1 skrll else
3316 1.1.1.6 christos {
3317 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
3318 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3319 1.1.1.6 christos }
3320 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xeb000000 | (insn0 & 0x00f00000) | ry;
3321 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x000d;
3322 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
3323 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3324 1.1 skrll }
3325 1.1 skrll }
3326 1.1 skrll else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GDCALL)
3327 1.1 skrll {
3328 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1;
3329 1.1 skrll
3330 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
3331 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3332 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
3333 1.1.1.6 christos {
3334 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
3335 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3336 1.1.1.6 christos }
3337 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
3338 1.1 skrll {
3339 1.1 skrll /* GD->LE transition.
3340 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
3341 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xc0040000;
3342 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0000;
3343 1.1 skrll }
3344 1.1 skrll else
3345 1.1 skrll {
3346 1.1 skrll /* GD->IE transition.
3347 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> lg %r2,0(%r2,%r12) */
3348 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xe322c000;
3349 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0004;
3350 1.1 skrll }
3351 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
3352 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3353 1.1 skrll }
3354 1.1 skrll else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LDCALL)
3355 1.1 skrll {
3356 1.1.1.9 christos if (!bfd_link_dll (info))
3357 1.1 skrll {
3358 1.1 skrll unsigned int insn0, insn1;
3359 1.1 skrll
3360 1.1 skrll insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
3361 1.1 skrll insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3362 1.1 skrll if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
3363 1.1.1.6 christos {
3364 1.1.1.6 christos invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
3365 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3366 1.1.1.6 christos }
3367 1.1 skrll /* LD->LE transition.
3368 1.1 skrll brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
3369 1.1 skrll insn0 = 0xc0040000;
3370 1.1 skrll insn1 = 0x0000;
3371 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
3372 1.1 skrll bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
3373 1.1 skrll }
3374 1.1 skrll }
3375 1.1 skrll continue;
3376 1.1 skrll
3377 1.1 skrll default:
3378 1.1 skrll break;
3379 1.1 skrll }
3380 1.1 skrll
3381 1.1 skrll /* Dynamic relocs are not propagated for SEC_DEBUGGING sections
3382 1.1 skrll because such sections are not SEC_ALLOC and thus ld.so will
3383 1.1 skrll not process them. */
3384 1.1 skrll if (unresolved_reloc
3385 1.1 skrll && !((input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0
3386 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_dynamic)
3387 1.1.1.3 christos && _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
3388 1.1.1.3 christos rel->r_offset) != (bfd_vma) -1)
3389 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler
3390 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
3391 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
3392 1.1.1.7 christos "unresolvable %s relocation against symbol `%s'"),
3393 1.1 skrll input_bfd,
3394 1.1 skrll input_section,
3395 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
3396 1.1 skrll howto->name,
3397 1.1 skrll h->root.root.string);
3398 1.1 skrll
3399 1.1.1.3 christos do_relocation:
3400 1.1.1.3 christos
3401 1.1.1.4 christos /* When applying a 24 bit reloc we need to start one byte
3402 1.1.1.4 christos earlier. Otherwise the 32 bit get/put bfd operations might
3403 1.1.1.4 christos access a byte after the actual section. */
3404 1.1.1.4 christos if (r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
3405 1.1.1.4 christos || r_type == R_390_PLT24DBL)
3406 1.1.1.4 christos rel->r_offset--;
3407 1.1.1.4 christos
3408 1.1.1.10 christos /* Issue an error if the right shift implied by the relocation
3409 1.1.1.10 christos would drop bits from the symbol value. */
3410 1.1.1.10 christos if (howto->rightshift
3411 1.1.1.10 christos && (relocation & (((bfd_vma)1 << howto->rightshift) - 1)))
3412 1.1.1.10 christos {
3413 1.1.1.10 christos _bfd_error_handler
3414 1.1.1.10 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
3415 1.1.1.10 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
3416 1.1.1.11 christos "relocation %s against misaligned symbol `%s' (%#" PRIx64 ") in %pB"),
3417 1.1.1.10 christos input_bfd,
3418 1.1.1.10 christos input_section,
3419 1.1.1.10 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
3420 1.1.1.11 christos howto->name,
3421 1.1.1.10 christos h->root.root.string,
3422 1.1.1.10 christos (uint64_t)relocation,
3423 1.1.1.11 christos sec->owner);
3424 1.1.1.10 christos return false;
3425 1.1.1.10 christos }
3426 1.1.1.10 christos
3427 1.1 skrll if (r_type == R_390_20
3428 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOT20
3429 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_GOTPLT20
3430 1.1 skrll || r_type == R_390_TLS_GOTIE20)
3431 1.1 skrll {
3432 1.1 skrll relocation += rel->r_addend;
3433 1.1 skrll relocation = (relocation&0xfff) << 8 | (relocation&0xff000) >> 12;
3434 1.1 skrll r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
3435 1.1 skrll contents, rel->r_offset,
3436 1.1 skrll relocation, 0);
3437 1.1 skrll }
3438 1.1 skrll else
3439 1.1 skrll r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
3440 1.1 skrll contents, rel->r_offset,
3441 1.1 skrll relocation, rel->r_addend);
3442 1.1 skrll
3443 1.1 skrll if (r != bfd_reloc_ok)
3444 1.1 skrll {
3445 1.1 skrll const char *name;
3446 1.1 skrll
3447 1.1 skrll if (h != NULL)
3448 1.1 skrll name = h->root.root.string;
3449 1.1 skrll else
3450 1.1 skrll {
3451 1.1 skrll name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
3452 1.1 skrll symtab_hdr->sh_link,
3453 1.1 skrll sym->st_name);
3454 1.1 skrll if (name == NULL)
3455 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3456 1.1 skrll if (*name == '\0')
3457 1.1.1.8 christos name = bfd_section_name (sec);
3458 1.1 skrll }
3459 1.1 skrll
3460 1.1 skrll if (r == bfd_reloc_overflow)
3461 1.1.1.5 christos (*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
3462 1.1.1.5 christos (info, (h ? &h->root : NULL), name, howto->name,
3463 1.1.1.5 christos (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rel->r_offset);
3464 1.1 skrll else
3465 1.1 skrll {
3466 1.1.1.6 christos _bfd_error_handler
3467 1.1.1.6 christos /* xgettext:c-format */
3468 1.1.1.7 christos (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): reloc against `%s': error %d"),
3469 1.1 skrll input_bfd, input_section,
3470 1.1.1.7 christos (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, name, (int) r);
3471 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3472 1.1 skrll }
3473 1.1 skrll }
3474 1.1 skrll }
3475 1.1 skrll
3476 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
3477 1.1 skrll }
3478 1.1 skrll
3479 1.1.1.3 christos /* Generate the PLT slots together with the dynamic relocations needed
3480 1.1.1.3 christos for IFUNC symbols. */
3481 1.1.1.3 christos
3482 1.1.1.3 christos static void
3483 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
3484 1.1.1.3 christos struct bfd_link_info *info,
3485 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
3486 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab,
3487 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma plt_offset,
3488 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma resolver_address)
3489 1.1.1.3 christos {
3490 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma plt_index;
3491 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_vma got_offset;
3492 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
3493 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_byte *loc;
3494 1.1.1.3 christos asection *plt, *gotplt, *relplt;
3495 1.1.1.3 christos
3496 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.iplt == NULL
3497 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.igotplt == NULL
3498 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.irelplt == NULL)
3499 1.1.1.3 christos abort ();
3500 1.1.1.3 christos
3501 1.1.1.3 christos /* Index of the PLT slot within iplt section. */
3502 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = plt_offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3503 1.1.1.3 christos plt = htab->elf.iplt;
3504 1.1.1.3 christos /* Offset into the igot.plt section. */
3505 1.1.1.3 christos got_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3506 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt = htab->elf.igotplt;
3507 1.1.1.3 christos relplt = htab->elf.irelplt;
3508 1.1.1.3 christos
3509 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT. */
3510 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (plt->contents + plt_offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
3511 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
3512 1.1.1.3 christos
3513 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
3514 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
3515 1.1.1.3 christos (gotplt->output_section->vma +
3516 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt->output_offset + got_offset
3517 1.1.1.3 christos - (plt->output_section->vma +
3518 1.1.1.3 christos plt->output_offset +
3519 1.1.1.3 christos plt_offset))/2,
3520 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 2);
3521 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
3522 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (plt->output_offset +
3523 1.1.1.3 christos (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
3524 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 24);
3525 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section. */
3526 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relplt->output_offset +
3527 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
3528 1.1.1.3 christos plt->contents + plt_offset + 28);
3529 1.1.1.3 christos
3530 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
3531 1.1.1.3 christos Points to instruction after GOT offset. */
3532 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
3533 1.1.1.3 christos (plt->output_section->vma
3534 1.1.1.3 christos + plt->output_offset
3535 1.1.1.3 christos + plt_offset
3536 1.1.1.3 christos + 14),
3537 1.1.1.3 christos gotplt->contents + got_offset);
3538 1.1.1.3 christos
3539 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section. */
3540 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (gotplt->output_section->vma
3541 1.1.1.3 christos + gotplt->output_offset
3542 1.1.1.3 christos + got_offset);
3543 1.1.1.3 christos
3544 1.1.1.3 christos if (!h
3545 1.1.1.3 christos || h->dynindx == -1
3546 1.1.1.4 christos || ((bfd_link_executable (info)
3547 1.1.1.3 christos || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
3548 1.1.1.3 christos && h->def_regular))
3549 1.1.1.3 christos {
3550 1.1.1.3 christos /* The symbol can be locally resolved. */
3551 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
3552 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = resolver_address;
3553 1.1.1.3 christos }
3554 1.1.1.3 christos else
3555 1.1.1.3 christos {
3556 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
3557 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = 0;
3558 1.1.1.3 christos }
3559 1.1.1.3 christos
3560 1.1.1.3 christos loc = relplt->contents + plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3561 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
3562 1.1.1.3 christos }
3563 1.1.1.3 christos
3564 1.1.1.3 christos
3565 1.1 skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling. We set the contents of various
3566 1.1 skrll dynamic sections here. */
3567 1.1 skrll
3568 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
3569 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
3570 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info,
3571 1.1.1.2 christos struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
3572 1.1.1.2 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
3573 1.1 skrll {
3574 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
3575 1.1.1.3 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry*)h;
3576 1.1 skrll
3577 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
3578 1.1 skrll
3579 1.1 skrll if (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
3580 1.1 skrll {
3581 1.1 skrll bfd_vma plt_index;
3582 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_vma gotplt_offset;
3583 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
3584 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3585 1.1 skrll
3586 1.1 skrll /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table. Set
3587 1.1 skrll it up. */
3588 1.1.1.4 christos if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
3589 1.1.1.3 christos {
3590 1.1.1.4 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, h,
3591 1.1.1.4 christos htab, h->plt.offset,
3592 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_address +
3593 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_offset +
3594 1.1.1.4 christos eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_section->vma);
3595 1.1.1.4 christos
3596 1.1.1.4 christos /* Do not return yet. Handling of explicit GOT slots of
3597 1.1.1.4 christos IFUNC symbols is below. */
3598 1.1.1.3 christos }
3599 1.1.1.3 christos else
3600 1.1.1.3 christos {
3601 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->dynindx == -1
3602 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.splt == NULL
3603 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.sgotplt == NULL
3604 1.1.1.3 christos || htab->elf.srelplt == NULL)
3605 1.1.1.3 christos abort ();
3606 1.1 skrll
3607 1.1.1.3 christos /* Calc. index no.
3608 1.1.1.3 christos Current offset - size first entry / entry size. */
3609 1.1.1.3 christos plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3610 1.1.1.3 christos
3611 1.1.1.8 christos /* The slots in the .got.plt correspond to the PLT slots in
3612 1.1.1.8 christos the same order. */
3613 1.1.1.8 christos gotplt_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3614 1.1.1.8 christos
3615 1.1.1.8 christos /* If .got.plt comes first it needs to contain the 3 header
3616 1.1.1.8 christos entries. */
3617 1.1.1.8 christos if (!s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info))
3618 1.1.1.8 christos gotplt_offset += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3619 1.1.1.3 christos
3620 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT. */
3621 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
3622 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
3623 1.1 skrll
3624 1.1.1.8 christos /* The first instruction in the PLT entry is a LARL loading
3625 1.1.1.8 christos the address of the GOT slot. We write the 4 byte
3626 1.1.1.8 christos immediate operand of the LARL instruction here. */
3627 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
3628 1.1.1.3 christos (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma +
3629 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset + gotplt_offset
3630 1.1.1.3 christos - (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma +
3631 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->output_offset +
3632 1.1.1.3 christos h->plt.offset))/2,
3633 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 2);
3634 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
3635 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE +
3636 1.1.1.3 christos (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
3637 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 24);
3638 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section. */
3639 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
3640 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 28);
3641 1.1 skrll
3642 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
3643 1.1.1.3 christos Points to instruction after GOT offset. */
3644 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
3645 1.1.1.3 christos (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
3646 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
3647 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset
3648 1.1.1.3 christos + 14),
3649 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + gotplt_offset);
3650 1.1.1.3 christos
3651 1.1.1.3 christos /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section. */
3652 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
3653 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
3654 1.1.1.8 christos + gotplt_offset);
3655 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
3656 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_addend = 0;
3657 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelplt->contents + plt_index *
3658 1.1.1.3 christos sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3659 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
3660 1.1.1.3 christos
3661 1.1.1.3 christos if (!h->def_regular)
3662 1.1.1.3 christos {
3663 1.1.1.3 christos /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
3664 1.1.1.3 christos the .plt section. Leave the value alone. This is a clue
3665 1.1.1.3 christos for the dynamic linker, to make function pointer
3666 1.1.1.3 christos comparisons work between an application and shared
3667 1.1.1.3 christos library. */
3668 1.1.1.3 christos sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
3669 1.1.1.3 christos }
3670 1.1 skrll }
3671 1.1 skrll }
3672 1.1 skrll
3673 1.1 skrll if (h->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
3674 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_GD
3675 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE
3676 1.1 skrll && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
3677 1.1 skrll {
3678 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
3679 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3680 1.1 skrll
3681 1.1 skrll /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table. Set it
3682 1.1 skrll up. */
3683 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL || htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
3684 1.1 skrll abort ();
3685 1.1 skrll
3686 1.1.1.3 christos rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
3687 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
3688 1.1 skrll + (h->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1));
3689 1.1 skrll
3690 1.1.1.3 christos if (h->def_regular && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
3691 1.1.1.3 christos {
3692 1.1.1.4 christos if (bfd_link_pic (info))
3693 1.1.1.3 christos {
3694 1.1.1.3 christos /* An explicit GOT slot usage needs GLOB_DAT. If the
3695 1.1.1.3 christos symbol references local the implicit got.iplt slot
3696 1.1.1.3 christos will be used and the IRELATIVE reloc has been created
3697 1.1.1.3 christos above. */
3698 1.1.1.3 christos goto do_glob_dat;
3699 1.1.1.3 christos }
3700 1.1.1.3 christos else
3701 1.1.1.3 christos {
3702 1.1.1.3 christos /* For non-shared objects explicit GOT slots must be
3703 1.1.1.3 christos filled with the PLT slot address for pointer
3704 1.1.1.3 christos equality reasons. */
3705 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
3706 1.1.1.3 christos + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
3707 1.1.1.3 christos + h->plt.offset),
3708 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
3709 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
3710 1.1.1.3 christos }
3711 1.1.1.3 christos }
3712 1.1.1.11 christos else if (SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
3713 1.1 skrll {
3714 1.1.1.6 christos if (UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
3715 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
3716 1.1.1.6 christos
3717 1.1.1.3 christos /* If this is a static link, or it is a -Bsymbolic link and
3718 1.1.1.3 christos the symbol is defined locally or was forced to be local
3719 1.1.1.3 christos because of a version file, we just want to emit a
3720 1.1.1.3 christos RELATIVE reloc. The entry in the global offset table
3721 1.1.1.3 christos will already have been initialized in the
3722 1.1.1.3 christos relocate_section function. */
3723 1.1.1.6 christos if (!(h->def_regular || ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (h)))
3724 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3725 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) != 0);
3726 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
3727 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
3728 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
3729 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
3730 1.1 skrll }
3731 1.1 skrll else
3732 1.1 skrll {
3733 1.1 skrll BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) == 0);
3734 1.1.1.6 christos do_glob_dat:
3735 1.1.1.3 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
3736 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_GLOB_DAT);
3737 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = 0;
3738 1.1 skrll }
3739 1.1 skrll
3740 1.1.1.3 christos loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
3741 1.1.1.3 christos loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3742 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
3743 1.1 skrll }
3744 1.1 skrll
3745 1.1 skrll if (h->needs_copy)
3746 1.1 skrll {
3747 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
3748 1.1.1.6 christos asection *s;
3749 1.1 skrll bfd_byte *loc;
3750 1.1 skrll
3751 1.1 skrll /* This symbols needs a copy reloc. Set it up. */
3752 1.1 skrll
3753 1.1 skrll if (h->dynindx == -1
3754 1.1 skrll || (h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
3755 1.1 skrll && h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
3756 1.1.1.6 christos || htab->elf.srelbss == NULL)
3757 1.1 skrll abort ();
3758 1.1 skrll
3759 1.1 skrll rela.r_offset = (h->root.u.def.value
3760 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
3761 1.1 skrll + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
3762 1.1 skrll rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_COPY);
3763 1.1 skrll rela.r_addend = 0;
3764 1.1.1.6 christos if (h->root.u.def.section == htab->elf.sdynrelro)
3765 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
3766 1.1.1.6 christos else
3767 1.1.1.6 christos s = htab->elf.srelbss;
3768 1.1.1.6 christos loc = s->contents + s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
3769 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
3770 1.1 skrll }
3771 1.1 skrll
3772 1.1 skrll /* Mark some specially defined symbols as absolute. */
3773 1.1.1.4 christos if (h == htab->elf.hdynamic
3774 1.1 skrll || h == htab->elf.hgot
3775 1.1 skrll || h == htab->elf.hplt)
3776 1.1 skrll sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
3777 1.1 skrll
3778 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
3779 1.1 skrll }
3780 1.1 skrll
3781 1.1 skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
3782 1.1 skrll dynamic linker, before writing them out. */
3783 1.1 skrll
3784 1.1 skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
3785 1.1.1.4 christos elf_s390_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
3786 1.1.1.4 christos const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
3787 1.1.1.4 christos const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
3788 1.1.1.4 christos {
3789 1.1.1.4 christos bfd *abfd = info->output_bfd;
3790 1.1.1.4 christos const struct elf_backend_data *bed = get_elf_backend_data (abfd);
3791 1.1.1.4 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
3792 1.1.1.4 christos unsigned long r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
3793 1.1.1.4 christos Elf_Internal_Sym sym;
3794 1.1.1.4 christos
3795 1.1.1.4 christos if (htab->elf.dynsym == NULL
3796 1.1.1.4 christos || !bed->s->swap_symbol_in (abfd,
3797 1.1.1.4 christos (htab->elf.dynsym->contents
3798 1.1.1.4 christos + r_symndx * bed->s->sizeof_sym),
3799 1.1.1.4 christos 0, &sym))
3800 1.1.1.4 christos abort ();
3801 1.1.1.4 christos
3802 1.1.1.4 christos /* Check relocation against STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol. */
3803 1.1.1.4 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym.st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
3804 1.1.1.4 christos return reloc_class_ifunc;
3805 1.1.1.4 christos
3806 1.1 skrll switch ((int) ELF64_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
3807 1.1 skrll {
3808 1.1 skrll case R_390_RELATIVE:
3809 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_relative;
3810 1.1 skrll case R_390_JMP_SLOT:
3811 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_plt;
3812 1.1 skrll case R_390_COPY:
3813 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_copy;
3814 1.1 skrll default:
3815 1.1 skrll return reloc_class_normal;
3816 1.1 skrll }
3817 1.1 skrll }
3818 1.1 skrll
3819 1.1 skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections. */
3820 1.1 skrll
3821 1.1.1.9 christos static bool
3822 1.1.1.2 christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
3823 1.1.1.2 christos struct bfd_link_info *info)
3824 1.1 skrll {
3825 1.1 skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
3826 1.1 skrll bfd *dynobj;
3827 1.1 skrll asection *sdyn;
3828 1.1.1.3 christos bfd *ibfd;
3829 1.1.1.3 christos unsigned int i;
3830 1.1 skrll
3831 1.1 skrll htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
3832 1.1.1.2 christos if (htab == NULL)
3833 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3834 1.1.1.2 christos
3835 1.1 skrll dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
3836 1.1.1.3 christos sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
3837 1.1 skrll
3838 1.1 skrll if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
3839 1.1 skrll {
3840 1.1 skrll Elf64_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
3841 1.1 skrll
3842 1.1.1.3 christos if (sdyn == NULL || htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
3843 1.1 skrll abort ();
3844 1.1 skrll
3845 1.1 skrll dyncon = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
3846 1.1 skrll dynconend = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
3847 1.1 skrll for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
3848 1.1 skrll {
3849 1.1 skrll Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
3850 1.1 skrll asection *s;
3851 1.1 skrll
3852 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
3853 1.1 skrll
3854 1.1 skrll switch (dyn.d_tag)
3855 1.1 skrll {
3856 1.1 skrll default:
3857 1.1 skrll continue;
3858 1.1 skrll
3859 1.1 skrll case DT_PLTGOT:
3860 1.1.1.8 christos /* DT_PLTGOT matches _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ */
3861 1.1.1.8 christos dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s390_got_pointer (info);
3862 1.1 skrll break;
3863 1.1 skrll
3864 1.1 skrll case DT_JMPREL:
3865 1.1.1.5 christos s = htab->elf.srelplt;
3866 1.1.1.5 christos dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
3867 1.1 skrll break;
3868 1.1 skrll
3869 1.1 skrll case DT_PLTRELSZ:
3870 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val = htab->elf.srelplt->size;
3871 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab->elf.irelplt)
3872 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val += htab->elf.irelplt->size;
3873 1.1 skrll break;
3874 1.1 skrll
3875 1.1 skrll case DT_RELASZ:
3876 1.1 skrll /* The procedure linkage table relocs (DT_JMPREL) should
3877 1.1 skrll not be included in the overall relocs (DT_RELA).
3878 1.1 skrll Therefore, we override the DT_RELASZ entry here to
3879 1.1 skrll make it not include the JMPREL relocs. Since the
3880 1.1 skrll linker script arranges for .rela.plt to follow all
3881 1.1 skrll other relocation sections, we don't have to worry
3882 1.1 skrll about changing the DT_RELA entry. */
3883 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.srelplt->size;
3884 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab->elf.irelplt)
3885 1.1.1.6 christos dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.irelplt->size;
3886 1.1 skrll break;
3887 1.1 skrll }
3888 1.1 skrll
3889 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
3890 1.1 skrll }
3891 1.1 skrll
3892 1.1 skrll /* Fill in the special first entry in the procedure linkage table. */
3893 1.1.1.3 christos if (htab->elf.splt && htab->elf.splt->size > 0)
3894 1.1 skrll {
3895 1.1 skrll /* fill in blueprint for plt 0 entry */
3896 1.1.1.3 christos memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents, elf_s390x_first_plt_entry,
3897 1.1.1.3 christos PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE);
3898 1.1.1.8 christos /* The second instruction in the first PLT entry is a LARL
3899 1.1.1.8 christos loading the GOT pointer. Fill in the LARL immediate
3900 1.1.1.8 christos address. */
3901 1.1 skrll bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
3902 1.1.1.8 christos (s390_got_pointer (info)
3903 1.1.1.5 christos - htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
3904 1.1.1.5 christos - htab->elf.splt->output_offset - 6)/2,
3905 1.1.1.3 christos htab->elf.splt->contents + 8);
3906 1.1 skrll }
3907 1.1.1.4 christos if (elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section) != NULL)
3908 1.1.1.4 christos elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize
3909 1.1.1.4 christos = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
3910 1.1 skrll }
3911 1.1 skrll
3912 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.hgot && htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section)
3913 1.1 skrll {
3914 1.1 skrll /* Fill in the first three entries in the global offset table. */
3915 1.1.1.8 christos if (htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->size > 0)
3916 1.1 skrll {
3917 1.1 skrll bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
3918 1.1 skrll (sdyn == NULL ? (bfd_vma) 0
3919 1.1 skrll : sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset),
3920 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents);
3921 1.1 skrll /* One entry for shared object struct ptr. */
3922 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0,
3923 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 8);
3924 1.1 skrll /* One entry for _dl_runtime_resolve. */
3925 1.1.1.8 christos bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0,
3926 1.1.1.8 christos htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 16);
3927 1.1 skrll }
3928 1.1.1.9 christos if (htab->elf.sgot != NULL && htab->elf.sgot->size > 0)
3929 1.1.1.9 christos elf_section_data (htab->elf.sgot->output_section)
3930 1.1.1.9 christos ->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 8;
3931 1.1 skrll }
3932 1.1.1.3 christos
3933 1.1.1.3 christos /* Finish dynamic symbol for local IFUNC symbols. */
3934 1.1.1.4 christos for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
3935 1.1.1.3 christos {
3936 1.1.1.3 christos struct plt_entry *local_plt;
3937 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
3938 1.1.1.3 christos Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
3939 1.1.1.3 christos
3940 1.1.1.3 christos symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
3941 1.1.1.3 christos
3942 1.1.1.6 christos if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd))
3943 1.1.1.6 christos continue;
3944 1.1.1.6 christos
3945 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
3946 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt != NULL)
3947 1.1.1.3 christos for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
3948 1.1.1.3 christos {
3949 1.1.1.3 christos if (local_plt[i].plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
3950 1.1.1.3 christos {
3951 1.1.1.3 christos asection *sec = local_plt[i].sec;
3952 1.1.1.9 christos isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache, ibfd, i);
3953 1.1.1.3 christos if (isym == NULL)
3954 1.1.1.9 christos return false;
3955 1.1.1.3 christos
3956 1.1.1.3 christos if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
3957 1.1.1.3 christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, NULL, htab,
3958 1.1.1.3 christos local_plt[i].plt.offset,
3959 1.1.1.3 christos isym->st_value
3960 1.1.1.3 christos + sec->output_section->vma
3961 1.1.1.3 christos + sec->output_offset);
3962 1.1.1.3 christos
3963 1.1.1.3 christos }
3964 1.1.1.3 christos }
3965 1.1.1.3 christos }
3966 1.1.1.3 christos
3967 1.1.1.11 christos /* Adjust .eh_frame for .plt section. */
3968 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame != NULL
3969 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->contents != NULL)
3970 1.1.1.11 christos {
3971 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL
3972 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0
3973 1.1.1.11 christos && (htab->elf.splt->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0
3974 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->output_section != NULL
3975 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_eh_frame->output_section != NULL)
3976 1.1.1.11 christos {
3977 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma plt_start = htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma;
3978 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma eh_frame_start = htab->plt_eh_frame->output_section->vma
3979 1.1.1.11 christos + htab->plt_eh_frame->output_offset
3980 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET;
3981 1.1.1.11 christos /* Note: Linker may have discarded the FDE, so that store may
3982 1.1.1.11 christos be beyond current htab->plt_eh_frame->size. Can be ignored,
3983 1.1.1.11 christos as htab->plt_eh_frame->contents got allocated with
3984 1.1.1.11 christos sizeof (elf_s390x_eh_frame_plt). See PR 12570. */
3985 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_signed_32 (dynobj, plt_start - eh_frame_start,
3986 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->contents
3987 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_FDE_START_OFFSET);
3988 1.1.1.11 christos }
3989 1.1.1.11 christos
3990 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame->sec_info_type == SEC_INFO_TYPE_EH_FRAME)
3991 1.1.1.11 christos {
3992 1.1.1.11 christos if (! _bfd_elf_write_section_eh_frame (output_bfd, info,
3993 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame,
3994 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame->contents))
3995 1.1.1.11 christos return NULL;
3996 1.1.1.11 christos }
3997 1.1.1.11 christos }
3998 1.1.1.11 christos
3999 1.1.1.11 christos /* Make any adjustment if necessary and merge .sframe section to
4000 1.1.1.11 christos create the final .sframe section for output_bfd. */
4001 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe != NULL
4002 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->contents != NULL)
4003 1.1.1.11 christos {
4004 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL
4005 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->size != 0
4006 1.1.1.11 christos && (htab->elf.splt->flags & SEC_EXCLUDE) == 0
4007 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->elf.splt->output_section != NULL
4008 1.1.1.11 christos && htab->plt_sframe->output_section != NULL)
4009 1.1.1.11 christos {
4010 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma plt_start = htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma;
4011 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_vma sframe_start = htab->plt_sframe->output_section->vma
4012 1.1.1.11 christos + htab->plt_sframe->output_offset
4013 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET;
4014 1.1.1.11 christos bfd_put_signed_32 (dynobj, plt_start - sframe_start,
4015 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->contents
4016 1.1.1.11 christos + PLT_SFRAME_FDE_START_OFFSET);
4017 1.1.1.11 christos }
4018 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe->sec_info_type == SEC_INFO_TYPE_SFRAME)
4019 1.1.1.11 christos {
4020 1.1.1.11 christos if (! _bfd_elf_merge_section_sframe (output_bfd, info,
4021 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe,
4022 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe->contents))
4023 1.1.1.11 christos return false;
4024 1.1.1.11 christos }
4025 1.1.1.11 christos }
4026 1.1.1.11 christos
4027 1.1.1.9 christos return true;
4028 1.1 skrll }
4029 1.1.1.6 christos
4030 1.1.1.6 christos /* Support for core dump NOTE sections. */
4032 1.1.1.9 christos
4033 1.1.1.6 christos static bool
4034 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
4035 1.1.1.6 christos {
4036 1.1.1.6 christos int offset;
4037 1.1.1.6 christos size_t size;
4038 1.1.1.6 christos
4039 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note->descsz)
4040 1.1.1.6 christos {
4041 1.1.1.9 christos default:
4042 1.1.1.6 christos return false;
4043 1.1.1.6 christos
4044 1.1.1.6 christos case 336: /* sizeof(struct elf_prstatus) on s390x */
4045 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_cursig */
4046 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
4047 1.1.1.6 christos
4048 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_pid */
4049 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 32);
4050 1.1.1.6 christos
4051 1.1.1.6 christos /* pr_reg */
4052 1.1.1.6 christos offset = 112;
4053 1.1.1.6 christos size = 216;
4054 1.1.1.6 christos break;
4055 1.1.1.6 christos }
4056 1.1.1.6 christos
4057 1.1.1.6 christos /* Make a ".reg/999" section. */
4058 1.1.1.6 christos return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
4059 1.1.1.6 christos size, note->descpos + offset);
4060 1.1.1.6 christos }
4061 1.1.1.9 christos
4062 1.1.1.6 christos static bool
4063 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
4064 1.1.1.6 christos {
4065 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note->descsz)
4066 1.1.1.6 christos {
4067 1.1.1.9 christos default:
4068 1.1.1.6 christos return false;
4069 1.1.1.6 christos
4070 1.1.1.6 christos case 136: /* sizeof(struct elf_prpsinfo) on s390x */
4071 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->pid
4072 1.1.1.6 christos = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
4073 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
4074 1.1.1.6 christos = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 40, 16);
4075 1.1.1.6 christos elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
4076 1.1.1.6 christos = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 56, 80);
4077 1.1.1.6 christos }
4078 1.1.1.6 christos
4079 1.1.1.6 christos /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
4080 1.1.1.6 christos onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
4081 1.1.1.6 christos implementations, so strip it off if it exists. */
4082 1.1.1.6 christos
4083 1.1.1.6 christos {
4084 1.1.1.6 christos char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
4085 1.1.1.6 christos int n = strlen (command);
4086 1.1.1.6 christos
4087 1.1.1.6 christos if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
4088 1.1.1.6 christos command[n - 1] = '\0';
4089 1.1.1.6 christos }
4090 1.1.1.9 christos
4091 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4092 1.1.1.6 christos }
4093 1.1.1.6 christos
4094 1.1.1.6 christos static char *
4095 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_write_core_note (bfd *abfd, char *buf, int *bufsiz,
4096 1.1.1.6 christos int note_type, ...)
4097 1.1.1.6 christos {
4098 1.1 skrll va_list ap;
4099 1.1.1.6 christos
4100 1.1.1.6 christos switch (note_type)
4101 1.1.1.6 christos {
4102 1.1.1.6 christos default:
4103 1.1.1.6 christos return NULL;
4104 1.1.1.6 christos
4105 1.1.1.6 christos case NT_PRPSINFO:
4106 1.1.1.7 christos {
4107 1.1.1.6 christos char data[136] ATTRIBUTE_NONSTRING = { 0 };
4108 1.1.1.6 christos const char *fname, *psargs;
4109 1.1.1.6 christos
4110 1.1.1.6 christos va_start (ap, note_type);
4111 1.1.1.6 christos fname = va_arg (ap, const char *);
4112 1.1.1.6 christos psargs = va_arg (ap, const char *);
4113 1.1.1.6 christos va_end (ap);
4114 1.1.1.6 christos
4115 1.1.1.8 christos strncpy (data + 40, fname, 16);
4116 1.1.1.7 christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001
4117 1.1.1.8 christos DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH;
4118 1.1.1.7 christos /* GCC 8.0 and 8.1 warn about 80 equals destination size with
4119 1.1.1.7 christos -Wstringop-truncation:
4120 1.1.1.7 christos https://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=85643
4121 1.1.1.7 christos */
4122 1.1.1.7 christos DIAGNOSTIC_IGNORE_STRINGOP_TRUNCATION;
4123 1.1.1.6 christos #endif
4124 1.1.1.8 christos strncpy (data + 56, psargs, 80);
4125 1.1.1.7 christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001
4126 1.1.1.7 christos DIAGNOSTIC_POP;
4127 1.1.1.6 christos #endif
4128 1.1.1.6 christos return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
4129 1.1.1.6 christos &data, sizeof (data));
4130 1.1.1.6 christos }
4131 1.1.1.6 christos
4132 1.1.1.6 christos case NT_PRSTATUS:
4133 1.1.1.6 christos {
4134 1.1.1.6 christos char data[336] = { 0 };
4135 1.1.1.6 christos long pid;
4136 1.1.1.6 christos int cursig;
4137 1.1.1.6 christos const void *gregs;
4138 1.1.1.6 christos
4139 1.1.1.6 christos va_start (ap, note_type);
4140 1.1.1.6 christos pid = va_arg (ap, long);
4141 1.1.1.6 christos cursig = va_arg (ap, int);
4142 1.1.1.6 christos gregs = va_arg (ap, const void *);
4143 1.1.1.6 christos va_end (ap);
4144 1.1.1.6 christos
4145 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_put_16 (abfd, cursig, data + 12);
4146 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_put_32 (abfd, pid, data + 32);
4147 1.1.1.6 christos memcpy (data + 112, gregs, 216);
4148 1.1.1.6 christos return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
4149 1.1.1.6 christos &data, sizeof (data));
4150 1.1.1.6 christos }
4151 1.1.1.6 christos }
4152 1.1.1.6 christos /* NOTREACHED */
4153 1.1.1.6 christos }
4154 1.1 skrll
4155 1.1 skrll /* Return address for Ith PLT stub in section PLT, for relocation REL
4157 1.1 skrll or (bfd_vma) -1 if it should not be included. */
4158 1.1 skrll
4159 1.1 skrll static bfd_vma
4160 1.1 skrll elf_s390_plt_sym_val (bfd_vma i, const asection *plt,
4161 1.1 skrll const arelent *rel ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4162 1.1 skrll {
4163 1.1 skrll return plt->vma + PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + i * PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
4164 1.1.1.4 christos }
4165 1.1.1.4 christos
4166 1.1.1.4 christos /* Merge backend specific data from an object file to the output
4167 1.1.1.9 christos object file when linking. */
4168 1.1.1.6 christos
4169 1.1.1.6 christos static bool
4170 1.1.1.6 christos elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data (bfd *ibfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
4171 1.1.1.9 christos {
4172 1.1.1.6 christos if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd) || !is_s390_elf (info->output_bfd))
4173 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4174 1.1.1.6 christos
4175 1.1.1.6 christos return elf_s390_merge_obj_attributes (ibfd, info);
4176 1.1.1.6 christos }
4177 1.1.1.6 christos
4178 1.1.1.6 christos /* We may add a PT_S390_PGSTE program header. */
4179 1.1.1.6 christos
4180 1.1.1.6 christos static int
4181 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_additional_program_headers (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
4182 1.1.1.6 christos struct bfd_link_info *info)
4183 1.1.1.6 christos {
4184 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
4185 1.1.1.6 christos
4186 1.1.1.6 christos if (info)
4187 1.1.1.6 christos {
4188 1.1.1.6 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
4189 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab)
4190 1.1.1.6 christos return htab->params->pgste;
4191 1.1.1.6 christos }
4192 1.1.1.6 christos return 0;
4193 1.1.1.6 christos }
4194 1.1.1.6 christos
4195 1.1.1.6 christos
4196 1.1.1.9 christos /* Add the PT_S390_PGSTE program header. */
4197 1.1.1.6 christos
4198 1.1.1.4 christos static bool
4199 1.1.1.6 christos elf_s390_modify_segment_map (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
4200 1.1.1.6 christos {
4201 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
4202 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_segment_map *m, *pm = NULL;
4203 1.1.1.9 christos
4204 1.1.1.6 christos if (!abfd || !info)
4205 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4206 1.1.1.6 christos
4207 1.1.1.9 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
4208 1.1.1.6 christos if (!htab || !htab->params->pgste)
4209 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4210 1.1.1.6 christos
4211 1.1.1.6 christos /* If there is already a PT_S390_PGSTE header, avoid adding
4212 1.1.1.6 christos another. */
4213 1.1.1.6 christos m = elf_seg_map (abfd);
4214 1.1.1.6 christos while (m && m->p_type != PT_S390_PGSTE)
4215 1.1.1.6 christos {
4216 1.1.1.6 christos pm = m;
4217 1.1.1.6 christos m = m->next;
4218 1.1.1.6 christos }
4219 1.1.1.9 christos
4220 1.1.1.4 christos if (m)
4221 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4222 1.1.1.6 christos
4223 1.1.1.6 christos m = (struct elf_segment_map *)
4224 1.1.1.9 christos bfd_zalloc (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_segment_map));
4225 1.1.1.6 christos if (m == NULL)
4226 1.1.1.6 christos return false;
4227 1.1.1.6 christos m->p_type = PT_S390_PGSTE;
4228 1.1.1.6 christos m->count = 0;
4229 1.1.1.6 christos m->next = NULL;
4230 1.1.1.4 christos if (pm)
4231 1.1.1.9 christos pm->next = m;
4232 1.1.1.4 christos
4233 1.1.1.4 christos return true;
4234 1.1.1.9 christos }
4235 1.1.1.6 christos
4236 1.1.1.6 christos bool
4237 1.1.1.6 christos bfd_elf_s390_set_options (struct bfd_link_info *info,
4238 1.1.1.6 christos struct s390_elf_params *params)
4239 1.1.1.6 christos {
4240 1.1.1.6 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
4241 1.1.1.6 christos
4242 1.1.1.6 christos if (info)
4243 1.1.1.6 christos {
4244 1.1.1.6 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
4245 1.1.1.6 christos if (htab)
4246 1.1.1.6 christos htab->params = params;
4247 1.1.1.9 christos }
4248 1.1.1.6 christos
4249 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4250 1.1.1.11 christos }
4251 1.1.1.11 christos
4252 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create .plt, .rela.plt, .got, .got.plt, .rela.got, .dynbss, and
4253 1.1.1.11 christos .rela.bss sections in DYNOBJ, and set up shortcuts to them in our
4254 1.1.1.11 christos hash table. */
4255 1.1.1.11 christos
4256 1.1.1.11 christos static bool
4257 1.1.1.11 christos elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *dynobj,
4258 1.1.1.11 christos struct bfd_link_info *info)
4259 1.1.1.11 christos {
4260 1.1.1.11 christos struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
4261 1.1.1.11 christos
4262 1.1.1.11 christos if (!_bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (dynobj, info))
4263 1.1.1.11 christos return false;
4264 1.1.1.11 christos
4265 1.1.1.11 christos htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
4266 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab == NULL)
4267 1.1.1.11 christos return false;
4268 1.1.1.11 christos
4269 1.1.1.11 christos htab->sframe_plt = &elf_s390x_sframe_plt;
4270 1.1.1.11 christos
4271 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->elf.splt != NULL)
4272 1.1.1.11 christos {
4273 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create .eh_frame section for .plt section. */
4274 1.1.1.11 christos if (!info->no_ld_generated_unwind_info)
4275 1.1.1.11 christos {
4276 1.1.1.11 christos flagword flags = (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY
4277 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_IN_MEMORY
4278 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_LINKER_CREATED);
4279 1.1.1.11 christos
4280 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame == NULL)
4281 1.1.1.11 christos {
4282 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_eh_frame
4283 1.1.1.11 christos = bfd_make_section_anyway_with_flags (dynobj,
4284 1.1.1.11 christos ".eh_frame",
4285 1.1.1.11 christos flags);
4286 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_eh_frame == NULL
4287 1.1.1.11 christos || !bfd_set_section_alignment (htab->plt_eh_frame, 3))
4288 1.1.1.11 christos return false;
4289 1.1.1.11 christos }
4290 1.1.1.11 christos }
4291 1.1.1.11 christos
4292 1.1.1.11 christos /* Create .sframe section for .plt section. */
4293 1.1.1.11 christos if (!info->no_ld_generated_unwind_info)
4294 1.1.1.11 christos {
4295 1.1.1.11 christos flagword flags = (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY
4296 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS | SEC_IN_MEMORY
4297 1.1.1.11 christos | SEC_LINKER_CREATED);
4298 1.1.1.11 christos
4299 1.1.1.11 christos htab->plt_sframe = bfd_make_section_anyway_with_flags (dynobj,
4300 1.1.1.11 christos ".sframe",
4301 1.1.1.11 christos flags);
4302 1.1.1.11 christos if (htab->plt_sframe == NULL)
4303 1.1.1.11 christos return false;
4304 1.1.1.11 christos
4305 1.1.1.11 christos elf_section_type (htab->plt_sframe) = SHT_GNU_SFRAME;
4306 1.1.1.11 christos }
4307 1.1.1.11 christos }
4308 1.1.1.11 christos
4309 1.1.1.6 christos return true;
4310 1.1 skrll }
4311 1.1 skrll
4312 1.1 skrll /* Why was the hash table entry size definition changed from
4313 1.1 skrll ARCH_SIZE/8 to 4? This breaks the 64 bit dynamic linker and
4314 1.1 skrll this is the only reason for the s390_elf64_size_info structure. */
4315 1.1 skrll
4316 1.1 skrll const struct elf_size_info s390_elf64_size_info =
4317 1.1 skrll {
4318 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Ehdr),
4319 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Phdr),
4320 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Shdr),
4321 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Rel),
4322 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
4323 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Sym),
4324 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf64_External_Dyn),
4325 1.1 skrll sizeof (Elf_External_Note),
4326 1.1 skrll 8, /* hash-table entry size. */
4327 1.1 skrll 1, /* internal relocations per external relocations. */
4328 1.1 skrll 64, /* arch_size. */
4329 1.1 skrll 3, /* log_file_align. */
4330 1.1 skrll ELFCLASS64, EV_CURRENT,
4331 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_out_phdrs,
4332 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_shdrs_and_ehdr,
4333 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_checksum_contents,
4334 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_write_relocs,
4335 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_in,
4336 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_out,
4337 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_slurp_reloc_table,
4338 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_slurp_symbol_table,
4339 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in,
4340 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out,
4341 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_in,
4342 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out,
4343 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_in,
4344 1.1 skrll bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out
4345 1.1.1.4 christos };
4346 1.1 skrll
4347 1.1 skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM s390_elf64_vec
4348 1.1.1.2 christos #define TARGET_BIG_NAME "elf64-s390"
4349 1.1 skrll #define ELF_ARCH bfd_arch_s390
4350 1.1 skrll #define ELF_TARGET_ID S390_ELF_DATA
4351 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE EM_S390
4352 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_ALT1 EM_S390_OLD
4353 1.1 skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE 0x1000
4354 1.1 skrll
4355 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_size_info s390_elf64_size_info
4356 1.1 skrll
4357 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections 1
4358 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount 1
4359 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt 1
4360 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly 1
4361 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym 0
4362 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size 24
4363 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro 1
4364 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal 1
4365 1.1 skrll
4366 1.1 skrll #define elf_info_to_howto elf_s390_info_to_howto
4367 1.1 skrll
4368 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_is_local_label_name elf_s390_is_local_label_name
4369 1.1.1.6 christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf_s390_link_hash_table_create
4370 1.1.1.4 christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_type_lookup elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup
4371 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_name_lookup elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup
4372 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_merge_private_bfd_data elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data
4373 1.1 skrll
4374 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol
4375 1.1.1.11 christos #define elf_backend_check_relocs elf_s390_check_relocs
4376 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol
4377 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections elf_s390_create_dynamic_sections
4378 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections
4379 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol
4380 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook elf_s390_gc_mark_hook
4381 1.1.1.11 christos #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class elf_s390_reloc_type_class
4382 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section elf_s390_relocate_section
4383 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_late_size_sections elf_s390_late_size_sections
4384 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_init_index_section _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
4385 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus elf_s390_grok_prstatus
4386 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo elf_s390_grok_psinfo
4387 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_write_core_note elf_s390_write_core_note
4388 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_plt_sym_val elf_s390_plt_sym_val
4389 1.1.1.6 christos #define elf_backend_sort_relocs_p elf_s390_elf_sort_relocs_p
4390 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_additional_program_headers elf_s390_additional_program_headers
4391 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_modify_segment_map elf_s390_modify_segment_map
4392 1.1 skrll
4393 1.1 skrll #define bfd_elf64_mkobject elf_s390_mkobject
4394 1.1 skrll #define elf_backend_object_p elf_s390_object_p
4395
4396 #include "elf64-target.h"
4397